xref: /openbmc/linux/include/net/mac80211.h (revision b737eecd)
1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2 /*
3  * mac80211 <-> driver interface
4  *
5  * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6  * Copyright 2006-2007	Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7  * Copyright 2007-2010	Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8  * Copyright 2013-2014  Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9  * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10  * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2020 Intel Corporation
11  */
12 
13 #ifndef MAC80211_H
14 #define MAC80211_H
15 
16 #include <linux/bug.h>
17 #include <linux/kernel.h>
18 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
19 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
22 #include <net/codel.h>
23 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
24 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
25 
26 /**
27  * DOC: Introduction
28  *
29  * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
30  * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
31  * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
32  * drivers.
33  */
34 
35 /**
36  * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
37  *
38  * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
39  * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
40  * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
41  * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
42  * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
43  * tasklet function.
44  *
45  * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
46  *	 use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
47  */
48 
49 /**
50  * DOC: Warning
51  *
52  * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
53  * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
54  */
55 
56 /**
57  * DOC: Frame format
58  *
59  * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
60  * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
61  * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
62  * hardware.
63  *
64  * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
65  *
66  * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
67  * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
68  *
69  * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
70  * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
71  */
72 
73 /**
74  * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
75  *
76  * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
77  * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
78  * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
79  * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
80  *
81  * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
82  * suspend.
83  *
84  * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
85  *
86  */
87 
88 /**
89  * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
90  *
91  * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
92  * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
93  * between different stations/interfaces.
94  * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
95  * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
96  * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
97  *
98  * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
99  * driver operation.
100  *
101  * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
102  * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
103  * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104  *
105  * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
106  * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
107  *
108  * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
109  * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
110  * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
111  *
112  * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
113  * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
114  * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
115  * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
116  * ieee80211_return_txq().
117  *
118  * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
119  * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
120  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
121  * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
122  * .release_buffered_frames().
123  * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
124  * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
125  * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
126  */
127 
128 struct device;
129 
130 /**
131  * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
132  *
133  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
134  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
135  */
136 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
137 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES =		16,
138 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP =	BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
139 };
140 
141 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE	0xff
142 
143 /**
144  * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
145  * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
146  * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
147  * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
148  * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
149  */
150 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
151 	IEEE80211_AC_VO		= 0,
152 	IEEE80211_AC_VI		= 1,
153 	IEEE80211_AC_BE		= 2,
154 	IEEE80211_AC_BK		= 3,
155 };
156 
157 /**
158  * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
159  *
160  * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
161  * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
162  *
163  * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
164  * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
165  *	2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
166  * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
167  * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
168  * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
169  * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
170  * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
171  * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
172  */
173 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
174 	u16 txop;
175 	u16 cw_min;
176 	u16 cw_max;
177 	u8 aifs;
178 	bool acm;
179 	bool uapsd;
180 	bool mu_edca;
181 	struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
182 };
183 
184 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
185 	unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
186 	unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
187 	unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
188 	unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
189 };
190 
191 /**
192  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
193  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
194  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
195  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
196  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
197  *	this is used only with channel switching with CSA
198  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
199  */
200 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
201 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH		= BIT(0),
202 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS	= BIT(1),
203 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR		= BIT(2),
204 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL	= BIT(3),
205 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH	= BIT(4),
206 };
207 
208 /**
209  * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
210  *
211  * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
212  * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
213  *
214  * @def: the channel definition
215  * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
216  * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
217  *	active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
218  * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
219  *	after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
220  *	this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
221  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
222  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
223  *	sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
224  */
225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
226 	struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
227 	struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
228 
229 	u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
230 
231 	bool radar_enabled;
232 
233 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
234 };
235 
236 /**
237  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
238  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
239  *	exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
240  *	needs to be switched from one to the other.
241  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
242  *      to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
243  *      will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
244  *      from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
245  *      implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
246  *      hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
247  *      will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
248  *      for changes/removal.)
249  */
250 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
251 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
252 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
253 };
254 
255 /**
256  * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
257  *
258  * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
259  * needs to switch from one chanctx to another.  The
260  * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
261  * done.
262  *
263  * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
264  * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
265  * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
266  */
267 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
268 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
269 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
270 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
271 };
272 
273 /**
274  * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
275  *
276  * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
277  * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
278  *
279  * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
280  *	also implies a change in the AID.
281  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
282  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
283  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
284  * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
285  * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
286  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
287  * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
288  *	reason (IBSS and managed mode)
289  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
290  *	new beacon (beaconing modes)
291  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
292  *	enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
293  * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
294  * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
295  * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
296  * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
297  *	that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
298  * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
299  * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
300  * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
301  * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
302  * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
303  * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
304  *	changed
305  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
306  *	currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
307  * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
308  *	note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
309  *	context had been assigned.
310  * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
311  * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
312  * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
313  *	keep alive) changed.
314  * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
315  * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder
316  *	functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
317  * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
318  * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
319  * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed
320  * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed.
321  * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
322  *	status changed.
323  *
324  */
325 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
326 	BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC		= 1<<0,
327 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT	= 1<<1,
328 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE	= 1<<2,
329 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT		= 1<<3,
330 	BSS_CHANGED_HT			= 1<<4,
331 	BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES		= 1<<5,
332 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT		= 1<<6,
333 	BSS_CHANGED_BSSID		= 1<<7,
334 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON		= 1<<8,
335 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED	= 1<<9,
336 	BSS_CHANGED_CQM			= 1<<10,
337 	BSS_CHANGED_IBSS		= 1<<11,
338 	BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER		= 1<<12,
339 	BSS_CHANGED_QOS			= 1<<13,
340 	BSS_CHANGED_IDLE		= 1<<14,
341 	BSS_CHANGED_SSID		= 1<<15,
342 	BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP	= 1<<16,
343 	BSS_CHANGED_PS			= 1<<17,
344 	BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER		= 1<<18,
345 	BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS		= 1<<19,
346 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO		= 1<<20,
347 	BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH		= 1<<21,
348 	BSS_CHANGED_OCB                 = 1<<22,
349 	BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS		= 1<<23,
350 	BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE		= 1<<24,
351 	BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE		= 1<<25,
352 	BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER	= 1<<26,
353 	BSS_CHANGED_TWT			= 1<<27,
354 	BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD		= 1<<28,
355 	BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR	= 1<<29,
356 	BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY      = 1<<30,
357 	BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31,
358 
359 	/* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
360 };
361 
362 /*
363  * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
364  * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
365  * filtering will be disabled.
366  */
367 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
368 
369 /**
370  * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
371  * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
372  * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
373  * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
374  * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
375  *	they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
376  *	once each time the timeout triggers.
377  */
378 enum ieee80211_event_type {
379 	RSSI_EVENT,
380 	MLME_EVENT,
381 	BAR_RX_EVENT,
382 	BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
383 };
384 
385 /**
386  * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
387  * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
388  * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
389  */
390 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
391 	RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
392 	RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
393 };
394 
395 /**
396  * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
397  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
398  */
399 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
400 	enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
401 };
402 
403 /**
404  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
405  * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
406  * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
407  * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
408  * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
409  */
410 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
411 	AUTH_EVENT,
412 	ASSOC_EVENT,
413 	DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
414 	DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
415 };
416 
417 /**
418  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
419  * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
420  * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
421  * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
422  */
423 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
424 	MLME_SUCCESS,
425 	MLME_DENIED,
426 	MLME_TIMEOUT,
427 };
428 
429 /**
430  * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
431  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
432  * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
433  * @reason: the reason code if applicable
434  */
435 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
436 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
437 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
438 	u16 reason;
439 };
440 
441 /**
442  * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
443  * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
444  * @tid: the tid
445  * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
446  */
447 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
448 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
449 	u16 tid;
450 	u16 ssn;
451 };
452 
453 /**
454  * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
455  * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
456  * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
457  * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
458  * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
459  * @u:union holding the fields above
460  */
461 struct ieee80211_event {
462 	enum ieee80211_event_type type;
463 	union {
464 		struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
465 		struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
466 		struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
467 	} u;
468 };
469 
470 /**
471  * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
472  *
473  * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
474  *
475  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
476  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
477  */
478 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
479 	u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
480 	u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
481 };
482 
483 /**
484  * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
485  *
486  * @lci: LCI subelement content
487  * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
488  * @lci_len: LCI data length
489  * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
490  */
491 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
492 	const u8 *lci;
493 	const u8 *civicloc;
494 	size_t lci_len;
495 	size_t civicloc_len;
496 };
497 
498 /**
499  * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from
500  * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail.
501  *
502  * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
503  * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
504  */
505 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery {
506 	u32 min_interval;
507 	u32 max_interval;
508 };
509 
510 /**
511  * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
512  *
513  * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
514  * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
515  *
516  * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
517  * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
518  * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
519  * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
520  *	ACK, BACK or both
521  * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
522  * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
523  * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
524  * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
525  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
526  * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
527  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
528  * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames
529  * @assoc: association status
530  * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
531  *	or not
532  * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
533  * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
534  * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
535  * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
536  * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
537  * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
538  *	valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
539  *	with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
540  * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
541  *	as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
542  *	HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
543  *	only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
544  *	association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
545  *	%BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
546  * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
547  *	the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
548  *	(see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
549  * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
550  *	is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
551  *	IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
552  *	by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
553  *	guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
554  * @beacon_int: beacon interval
555  * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
556  * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
557  *	index into the rate table configured by the driver in
558  *	the current band.
559  * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
560  * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
561  * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
562  * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
563  * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
564  *	configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
565  * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
566  * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
567  *	This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
568  *	Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
569  *	be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
570  * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
571  *	implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
572  *	cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
573  *	relation to the newly configured threshold.
574  * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
575  *	implies disabled.  This is an alternative mechanism to the single
576  *	threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
577  * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
578  * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
579  * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
580  *	may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
581  *	The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
582  *	to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
583  * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
584  *	may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
585  *	array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
586  * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
587  * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
588  *	hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
589  *	your driver/device needs to do.
590  * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
591  *	offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
592  * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
593  * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
594  * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
595  * @txpower: TX power in dBm.  INT_MIN means not configured.
596  * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
597  *	Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
598  *	TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
599  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
600  *	userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
601  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
602  * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
603  * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
604  *	to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
605  *	if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
606  * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
607  *	transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
608  *	In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
609  *	a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
610  * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
611  *	protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
612  *	station.
613  * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
614  *	responder functionality.
615  * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
616  * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
617  * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
618  * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
619  * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
620  * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
621  *	nontransmitted BSSIDs
622  * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
623  *	in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
624  * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are
625  *	connected to (STA)
626  * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
627  * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE
628  * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration
629  * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
630  *	interval.
631  * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format).
632  * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed
633  *	to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware.
634  */
635 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
636 	const u8 *bssid;
637 	u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
638 	bool uora_exists;
639 	u8 uora_ocw_range;
640 	u16 frame_time_rts_th;
641 	bool he_support;
642 	bool twt_requester;
643 	bool twt_responder;
644 	bool twt_protected;
645 	/* association related data */
646 	bool assoc, ibss_joined;
647 	bool ibss_creator;
648 	u16 aid;
649 	/* erp related data */
650 	bool use_cts_prot;
651 	bool use_short_preamble;
652 	bool use_short_slot;
653 	bool enable_beacon;
654 	u8 dtim_period;
655 	u16 beacon_int;
656 	u16 assoc_capability;
657 	u64 sync_tsf;
658 	u32 sync_device_ts;
659 	u8 sync_dtim_count;
660 	u32 basic_rates;
661 	struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
662 	int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
663 	u16 ht_operation_mode;
664 	s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
665 	u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
666 	s32 cqm_rssi_low;
667 	s32 cqm_rssi_high;
668 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
669 	struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
670 	__be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
671 	int arp_addr_cnt;
672 	bool qos;
673 	bool idle;
674 	bool ps;
675 	u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
676 	size_t ssid_len;
677 	bool hidden_ssid;
678 	int txpower;
679 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
680 	struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
681 	bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
682 	u16 max_idle_period;
683 	bool protected_keep_alive;
684 	bool ftm_responder;
685 	struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
686 	/* Multiple BSSID data */
687 	bool nontransmitted;
688 	u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
689 	u8 bssid_index;
690 	u8 bssid_indicator;
691 	bool ema_ap;
692 	u8 profile_periodicity;
693 	struct {
694 		u32 params;
695 		u16 nss_set;
696 	} he_oper;
697 	struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
698 	struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color;
699 	struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery;
700 	u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval;
701 	bool s1g;
702 	struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate;
703 };
704 
705 /**
706  * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
707  *
708  * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
709  *
710  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
711  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
712  *	number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
713  *	number and increasing the sequence number only when the
714  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
715  *	assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
716  *	for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
717  *	that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
718  *	If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
719  *	assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
720  *	802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
721  *	beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
722  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
723  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
724  *	station
725  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
726  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
727  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
728  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
729  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
730  *	because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
731  *	avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
732  *	firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
733  *	went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
734  *	the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
735  *	that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
736  *	since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
737  *	hardware queue.
738  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
739  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
740  * 	is for the whole aggregation.
741  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
742  * 	so consider using block ack request (BAR).
743  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
744  *	set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
745  *	be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
746  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
747  *	that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
748  *	off-channel operation.
749  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation
750  *	(header conversion)
751  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
752  *	used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
753  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
754  *	used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
755  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
756  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
757  *	be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
758  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
759  *	transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
760  *	by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
761  *	queue gets full.
762  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
763  *	after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
764  *	be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
765  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
766  *	code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
767  *	should kick the MLME state machine.
768  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
769  *	MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
770  *	status to user space)
771  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
772  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
773  *	frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
774  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
775  *	the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
776  *	in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
777  *	handled properly by the device.
778  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
779  *	testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
780  *	TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
781  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
782  *	This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
783  *	frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
784  * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
785  *	when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
786  *	an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
787  *	the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
788  *	PS-Poll responses.
789  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
790  *	This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
791  *	the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
792  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
793  *	would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
794  *	monitor injection).
795  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
796  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
797  *	any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
798  *	This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
799  *	behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
800  *
801  * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
802  *	 forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
803  */
804 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
805 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS		= BIT(0),
806 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ		= BIT(1),
807 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK			= BIT(2),
808 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT		= BIT(3),
809 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT		= BIT(4),
810 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM	= BIT(5),
811 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU			= BIT(6),
812 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED		= BIT(7),
813 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED		= BIT(8),
814 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK			= BIT(9),
815 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU			= BIT(10),
816 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK		= BIT(11),
817 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE	= BIT(12),
818 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK	= BIT(13),
819 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP		= BIT(14),
820 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED		= BIT(15),
821 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT		= BIT(16),
822 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER		= BIT(17),
823 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES		= BIT(18),
824 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION	= BIT(19),
825 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX		= BIT(20),
826 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX	= BIT(21),
827 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC			= BIT(22),
828 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC			= BIT(23) | BIT(24),
829 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN		= BIT(25),
830 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE	= BIT(26),
831 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE		= BIT(27),
832 	IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP		= BIT(28),
833 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE		= BIT(29),
834 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG		= BIT(30),
835 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED	= BIT(31),
836 };
837 
838 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT		23
839 
840 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS
841 
842 /**
843  * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
844  *
845  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
846  *	protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
847  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
848  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
849  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
850  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
851  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
852  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
853  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
854  *	used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
855  *	it can be sent out.
856  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that
857  *	has already been assigned to this frame.
858  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered
859  *	relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent
860  *	of their QoS TID or other priority field values.
861  *
862  * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
863  */
864 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
865 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO	= BIT(0),
866 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE		= BIT(1),
867 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT		= BIT(2),
868 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU			= BIT(3),
869 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT		= BIT(4),
870 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP	= BIT(5),
871 	IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING	= BIT(6),
872 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO		= BIT(7),
873 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER		= BIT(8),
874 };
875 
876 /*
877  * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
878  * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
879  */
880 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK |		      \
881 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT |    \
882 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU |	      \
883 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED |	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK |		      \
884 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK |	      \
885 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER |    \
886 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC |		      \
887 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
888 
889 /**
890  * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
891  *	Rate Control algorithm.
892  *
893  * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
894  * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
895  *
896  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
897  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
898  *	This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
899  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
900  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
901  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
902  *	into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
903  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
904  *	Greenfield mode.
905  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
906  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
907  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
908  *	(80+80 isn't supported yet)
909  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
910  *	adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
911  *	NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
912  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
913  */
914 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
915 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS		= BIT(0),
916 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT		= BIT(1),
917 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE	= BIT(2),
918 
919 	/* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
920 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS			= BIT(3),
921 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD		= BIT(4),
922 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(5),
923 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA		= BIT(6),
924 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI		= BIT(7),
925 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS			= BIT(8),
926 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(9),
927 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(10),
928 };
929 
930 
931 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
932 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
933 
934 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
935 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
936 
937 /* maximum number of rate stages */
938 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES	4
939 
940 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
941 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE	4
942 
943 /**
944  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
945  *
946  * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
947  * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
948  * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
949  *
950  * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
951  * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
952  *
953  * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
954  * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
955  *
956  * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
957  * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
958  * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
959  * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
960  * information::
961  *
962  *    { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
963  *
964  * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
965  * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
966  * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
967  * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
968  * information should then contain::
969  *
970  *   { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
971  *
972  * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
973  * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
974  */
975 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
976 	s8 idx;
977 	u16 count:5,
978 	    flags:11;
979 } __packed;
980 
981 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY		31
982 
983 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
984 					  u8 mcs, u8 nss)
985 {
986 	WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
987 	WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
988 	rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
989 }
990 
991 static inline u8
992 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
993 {
994 	return rate->idx & 0xF;
995 }
996 
997 static inline u8
998 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
999 {
1000 	return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
1001 }
1002 
1003 /**
1004  * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
1005  *
1006  * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
1007  *  (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
1008  *  (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
1009  *  (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
1010  *
1011  * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
1012  * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
1013  * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
1014  * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
1015  * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
1016  * @control: union part for control data
1017  * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
1018  * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
1019  * @control.use_rts: use RTS
1020  * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
1021  * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
1022  * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
1023  * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
1024  * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
1025  * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
1026  * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
1027  * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
1028  * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
1029  * @pad: padding
1030  * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
1031  * @status: union part for status data
1032  * @status.rates: attempted rates
1033  * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
1034  * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
1035  * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
1036  * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
1037  * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only
1038  *	used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness
1039  * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
1040  * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
1041  * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
1042  * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
1043  * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1044  * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
1045  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1046  * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1047  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1048  * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1049  */
1050 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1051 	/* common information */
1052 	u32 flags;
1053 	u32 band:3,
1054 	    ack_frame_id:13,
1055 	    hw_queue:4,
1056 	    tx_time_est:10;
1057 	/* 2 free bits */
1058 
1059 	union {
1060 		struct {
1061 			union {
1062 				/* rate control */
1063 				struct {
1064 					struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1065 						IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1066 					s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1067 					u8 use_rts:1;
1068 					u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1069 					u8 short_preamble:1;
1070 					u8 skip_table:1;
1071 					/* 2 bytes free */
1072 				};
1073 				/* only needed before rate control */
1074 				unsigned long jiffies;
1075 			};
1076 			/* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1077 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1078 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1079 			u32 flags;
1080 			codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1081 		} control;
1082 		struct {
1083 			u64 cookie;
1084 		} ack;
1085 		struct {
1086 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1087 			s32 ack_signal;
1088 			u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1089 			u8 ampdu_len;
1090 			u8 antenna;
1091 			u16 tx_time;
1092 			bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1093 			void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1094 		} status;
1095 		struct {
1096 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1097 				IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1098 			u8 pad[4];
1099 
1100 			void *rate_driver_data[
1101 				IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1102 		};
1103 		void *driver_data[
1104 			IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1105 	};
1106 };
1107 
1108 static inline u16
1109 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
1110 {
1111 	/* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
1112 	 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
1113 	 */
1114 	info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
1115 	return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1116 }
1117 
1118 static inline u16
1119 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1120 {
1121 	return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1122 }
1123 
1124 /**
1125  * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control
1126  *
1127  * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1128  * @info: Basic tx status information
1129  * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1130  * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet
1131  * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver
1132  */
1133 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1134 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1135 	struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1136 	struct sk_buff *skb;
1137 	struct rate_info *rate;
1138 	struct list_head *free_list;
1139 };
1140 
1141 /**
1142  * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1143  *
1144  * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1145  * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1146  * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1147  *
1148  * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1149  * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1150  * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1151  * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1152  */
1153 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1154 	const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1155 	size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1156 	const u8 *common_ies;
1157 	size_t common_ie_len;
1158 };
1159 
1160 
1161 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1162 {
1163 	return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1164 }
1165 
1166 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1167 {
1168 	return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1169 }
1170 
1171 /**
1172  * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1173  *
1174  * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1175  *
1176  * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1177  * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1178  * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1179  * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1180  *
1181  * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1182  *	 info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1183  *	 instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1184  */
1185 static inline void
1186 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1187 {
1188 	int i;
1189 
1190 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1191 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1192 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1193 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1194 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1195 	/* clear the rate counts */
1196 	for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1197 		info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1198 
1199 	BUILD_BUG_ON(
1200 	    offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1201 	memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1202 	       sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1203 	       offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1204 }
1205 
1206 
1207 /**
1208  * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1209  *
1210  * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1211  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1212  *	Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1213  * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1214  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1215  *	verification has been done by the hardware.
1216  * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1217  *	If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1218  *	hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1219  * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1220  *	flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1221  *	Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1222  *	is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1223  * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1224  *	de-duplication by itself.
1225  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1226  *	the frame.
1227  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1228  *	the frame.
1229  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1230  *	field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1231  *	was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1232  *	merging.
1233  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1234  *	field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1235  *	(including FCS) was received.
1236  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1237  *	field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1238  * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1239  *	Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1240  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1241  *	number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1242  *	each A-MPDU
1243  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1244  *	subframes of a single A-MPDU
1245  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1246  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1247  *	on this subframe
1248  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1249  *	is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1250  * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1251  *	done by the hardware
1252  * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1253  *	processing it in any regular way.
1254  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1255  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1256  * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1257  *	monitor interfaces.
1258  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1259  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1260  * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1261  *	subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1262  *	All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1263  *	if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1264  *	the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1265  *	deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1266  *	subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1267  *	either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1268  *	interleaved with other frames.
1269  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1270  *	radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1271  *	the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1272  * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1273  *	This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1274  *	the first subframe.
1275  * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1276  *	be done in the hardware.
1277  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1278  *	frame
1279  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1280  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1281  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1282  *
1283  *	 - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1284  *	 - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1285  *	 - DATA3_CODING
1286  *	 - DATA5_GI
1287  *	 - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1288  *	 - DATA6_NSTS
1289  *	 - DATA3_STBC
1290  *
1291  *	from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1292  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1293  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1294  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1295  * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1296  *	the "0-length PSDU" field included there.  The value for it is
1297  *	in &struct ieee80211_rx_status.  Note that if this value isn't
1298  *	known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1299  * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by
1300  *	hardware or driver)
1301  */
1302 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1303 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR		= BIT(0),
1304 	RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED		= BIT(1),
1305 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START	= BIT(2),
1306 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(3),
1307 	RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED		= BIT(4),
1308 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC		= BIT(5),
1309 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC 	= BIT(6),
1310 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START		= BIT(7),
1311 	RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL		= BIT(8),
1312 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS		= BIT(9),
1313 	RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED		= BIT(10),
1314 	RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED		= BIT(11),
1315 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN	= BIT(12),
1316 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST		= BIT(13),
1317 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR	= BIT(14),
1318 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN	= BIT(15),
1319 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END		= BIT(16),
1320 	RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR		= BIT(17),
1321 	RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR		= BIT(18),
1322 	RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE		= BIT(19),
1323 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA	= BIT(20),
1324 	RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(21),
1325 	RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN		= BIT(22),
1326 	RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED		= BIT(23),
1327 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT		= BIT(24),
1328 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN	= BIT(25),
1329 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE		= BIT(26),
1330 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU		= BIT(27),
1331 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG		= BIT(28),
1332 	RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU			= BIT(29),
1333 	RX_FLAG_8023			= BIT(30),
1334 };
1335 
1336 /**
1337  * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1338  *
1339  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1340  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1341  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1342  *	if the driver fills this value it should add
1343  *	%IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1344  *	to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1345  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1346  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1347  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1348  */
1349 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1350 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE		= BIT(0),
1351 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI		= BIT(2),
1352 	RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF		= BIT(3),
1353 	RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK		= BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1354 	RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC		= BIT(6),
1355 	RX_ENC_FLAG_BF			= BIT(7),
1356 };
1357 
1358 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT		4
1359 
1360 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1361 	RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1362 	RX_ENC_HT,
1363 	RX_ENC_VHT,
1364 	RX_ENC_HE,
1365 };
1366 
1367 /**
1368  * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1369  *
1370  * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1371  * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1372  * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1373  *
1374  * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1375  * 	(TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1376  * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1377  *	needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1378  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1379  *	it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1380  * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1381  * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1382  *	This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1383  *	for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1384  * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz.
1385  * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1386  *	unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1387  *	@IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1388  * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1389  *	values were filled.
1390  * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1391  *	support dB or unspecified units)
1392  * @antenna: antenna used
1393  * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1394  *	HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1395  * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1396  * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1397  * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1398  * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1399  * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1400  * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1401  * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1402  * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1403  * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1404  * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1405  *	each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1406  * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1407  * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1408  */
1409 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1410 	u64 mactime;
1411 	u64 boottime_ns;
1412 	u32 device_timestamp;
1413 	u32 ampdu_reference;
1414 	u32 flag;
1415 	u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1;
1416 	u8 enc_flags;
1417 	u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1418 	u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1419 	u8 rate_idx;
1420 	u8 nss;
1421 	u8 rx_flags;
1422 	u8 band;
1423 	u8 antenna;
1424 	s8 signal;
1425 	u8 chains;
1426 	s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1427 	u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1428 	u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1429 };
1430 
1431 static inline u32
1432 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status)
1433 {
1434 	return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) +
1435 	       (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0);
1436 }
1437 
1438 /**
1439  * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1440  * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1441  *	(this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1442  *	 bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1443  * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1444  *	alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1445  *	description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1446  *	Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1447  * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1448  * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1449  * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1450  *	then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1451  *	@data field.
1452  * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1453  *	the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1454  *	length
1455  * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1456  *
1457  * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1458  * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1459  * data.
1460  */
1461 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1462 	u32 present;
1463 	u8 align;
1464 	u8 oui[3];
1465 	u8 subns;
1466 	u8 pad;
1467 	u16 len;
1468 	u8 data[];
1469 } __packed;
1470 
1471 /**
1472  * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1473  *
1474  * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1475  *
1476  * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1477  *	to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1478  *	or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1479  * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1480  *	This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1481  *	meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1482  *	transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1483  *	Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1484  *	driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1485  *	for more.
1486  * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1487  *	the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1488  *	may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1489  *	be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1490  *	it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1491  * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1492  *	operating channel.
1493  */
1494 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1495 	IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR		= (1<<0),
1496 	IEEE80211_CONF_PS		= (1<<1),
1497 	IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE		= (1<<2),
1498 	IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL	= (1<<3),
1499 };
1500 
1501 
1502 /**
1503  * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1504  *
1505  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1506  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1507  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1508  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1509  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1510  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1511  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1512  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1513  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1514  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1515  */
1516 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1517 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS		= BIT(1),
1518 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL	= BIT(2),
1519 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR		= BIT(3),
1520 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS		= BIT(4),
1521 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER		= BIT(5),
1522 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL		= BIT(6),
1523 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS	= BIT(7),
1524 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE		= BIT(8),
1525 };
1526 
1527 /**
1528  * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1529  *
1530  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1531  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1532  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1533  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1534  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1535  */
1536 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1537 	IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1538 	IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1539 	IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1540 	IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1541 
1542 	/* keep last */
1543 	IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1544 };
1545 
1546 /**
1547  * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1548  *
1549  * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1550  *
1551  * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1552  *
1553  * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1554  * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1555  *	in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1556  *	has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1557  * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1558  *	powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1559  *	the CONF_PS flag is set.
1560  *
1561  * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1562  *	value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1563  *
1564  * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1565  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1566  *
1567  * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1568  *	(a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1569  *	but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1570  * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1571  *	frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1572  *	number of transmissions not the number of retries
1573  *
1574  * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1575  *	%IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1576  *	configured for an HT channel.
1577  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1578  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1579  */
1580 struct ieee80211_conf {
1581 	u32 flags;
1582 	int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1583 
1584 	u16 listen_interval;
1585 	u8 ps_dtim_period;
1586 
1587 	u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1588 
1589 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1590 	bool radar_enabled;
1591 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1592 };
1593 
1594 /**
1595  * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1596  *
1597  * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1598  * operation.
1599  *
1600  * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1601  *	Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1602  *	announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1603  *	the driver passed into mac80211.
1604  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1605  *	rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1606  * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1607  *	scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1608  * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1609  * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1610  * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1611   *	current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1612   *	channel, expressed in TU.
1613  */
1614 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1615 	u64 timestamp;
1616 	u32 device_timestamp;
1617 	bool block_tx;
1618 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1619 	u8 count;
1620 	u32 delay;
1621 };
1622 
1623 /**
1624  * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1625  *
1626  * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1627  *	on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1628  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1629  *	monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1630  *	connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1631  *	provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1632  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1633  *	interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1634  *	but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1635  *	only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1636  * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1637  *	and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1638  *	this is not pure P2P vif.
1639  */
1640 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1641 	IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER		= BIT(0),
1642 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI		= BIT(1),
1643 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD		= BIT(2),
1644 	IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE		= BIT(3),
1645 };
1646 
1647 
1648 /**
1649  * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags
1650  *
1651  * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled
1652  *	The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211.
1653  *	It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface.
1654  * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload
1655  * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled
1656  *	The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to
1657  *	mac80211.
1658  */
1659 
1660 enum ieee80211_offload_flags {
1661 	IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED		= BIT(0),
1662 	IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR		= BIT(1),
1663 	IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED		= BIT(2),
1664 };
1665 
1666 /**
1667  * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1668  *
1669  * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1670  * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1671  *
1672  * @type: type of this virtual interface
1673  * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1674  *	or the BSS we're associated to
1675  * @addr: address of this interface
1676  * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1677  *	interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1678  * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1679  *	write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1680  *	for read access.
1681  * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1682  * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1683  *	these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1684  *	or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1685  *	at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1686  * @offloaad_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface.
1687  *	These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface,
1688  *	.change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver
1689  *	within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change
1690  *	restrictions.
1691  * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1692  * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1693  * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1694  *	when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1695  *	path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1696  *	be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1697  *	processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1698  * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1699  *	interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1700  *	monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1701  * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1702  *	interface.
1703  * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211
1704  *	for this interface.
1705  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1706  *	sizeof(void \*).
1707  * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1708  * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1709  *	protected by fq->lock.
1710  * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see
1711  *	&enum ieee80211_offload_flags.
1712  */
1713 struct ieee80211_vif {
1714 	enum nl80211_iftype type;
1715 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1716 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1717 	bool p2p;
1718 	bool csa_active;
1719 	bool mu_mimo_owner;
1720 
1721 	u8 cab_queue;
1722 	u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1723 
1724 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1725 
1726 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1727 
1728 	u32 driver_flags;
1729 	u32 offload_flags;
1730 
1731 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1732 	struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1733 #endif
1734 
1735 	bool probe_req_reg;
1736 	bool rx_mcast_action_reg;
1737 
1738 	bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1739 
1740 	/* must be last */
1741 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1742 };
1743 
1744 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1745 {
1746 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1747 	return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1748 #endif
1749 	return false;
1750 }
1751 
1752 /**
1753  * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1754  * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1755  *
1756  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1757  * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1758  *
1759  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1760  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1761  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1762  */
1763 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1764 
1765 /**
1766  * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1767  * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1768  *
1769  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1770  * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1771  *
1772  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1773  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1774  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1775  */
1776 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1777 
1778 /**
1779  * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1780  *
1781  * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1782  * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1783  *
1784  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1785  *	driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1786  *	particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1787  *	will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1788  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1789  *	the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1790  *	generation in software.
1791  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1792  *	that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1793  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1794  *	CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1795  *	(MFP) to be done in software.
1796  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1797  *	if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1798  *	itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1799  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1800  *	not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1801  *	MIC.
1802  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1803  *	management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1804  *	crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1805  *	properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1806  *	fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1807  *	RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1808  *	%IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1809  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1810  *	driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1811  *	only for management frames (MFP).
1812  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1813  *	driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1814  *	be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1815  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1816  *	a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1817  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1818  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1819  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1820  *	for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1821  *	generation only
1822  */
1823 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1824 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT	= BIT(0),
1825 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV		= BIT(1),
1826 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC	= BIT(2),
1827 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE		= BIT(3),
1828 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX		= BIT(4),
1829 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE		= BIT(5),
1830 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT		= BIT(6),
1831 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM	= BIT(7),
1832 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE	= BIT(8),
1833 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX		= BIT(9),
1834 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE	= BIT(10),
1835 };
1836 
1837 /**
1838  * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1839  *
1840  * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1841  * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1842  *
1843  * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1844  *	wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1845  *	encrypted in hardware.
1846  * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1847  * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1848  *	needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1849  * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1850  * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1851  * @keylen: key material length
1852  * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1853  * 	data block:
1854  * 	- Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1855  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1856  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1857  * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1858  * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1859  */
1860 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1861 	atomic64_t tx_pn;
1862 	u32 cipher;
1863 	u8 icv_len;
1864 	u8 iv_len;
1865 	u8 hw_key_idx;
1866 	s8 keyidx;
1867 	u16 flags;
1868 	u8 keylen;
1869 	u8 key[];
1870 };
1871 
1872 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN	16
1873 
1874 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1875 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1876 
1877 /**
1878  * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1879  *
1880  * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1881  * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1882  *	reverse order than in packet)
1883  * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1884  *	reverse order than in packet)
1885  * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1886  *	reverse order than in packet)
1887  * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1888  *	reverse order than in packet)
1889  * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1890  */
1891 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1892 	union {
1893 		struct {
1894 			u32 iv32;
1895 			u16 iv16;
1896 		} tkip;
1897 		struct {
1898 			u8 pn[6];
1899 		} ccmp;
1900 		struct {
1901 			u8 pn[6];
1902 		} aes_cmac;
1903 		struct {
1904 			u8 pn[6];
1905 		} aes_gmac;
1906 		struct {
1907 			u8 pn[6];
1908 		} gcmp;
1909 		struct {
1910 			u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1911 			u8 seq_len;
1912 		} hw;
1913 	};
1914 };
1915 
1916 /**
1917  * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1918  *
1919  * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1920  * the secure packet crypto handling.
1921  *
1922  * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1923  * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1924  * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1925  * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1926  * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1927  * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1928  * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1929  * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1930  *     key_idx value calculation:
1931  *      (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1932  * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1933  */
1934 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1935 	u32 cipher;
1936 	u16 iftype;
1937 	u8 hdr_len;
1938 	u8 pn_len;
1939 	u8 pn_off;
1940 	u8 key_idx_off;
1941 	u8 key_idx_mask;
1942 	u8 key_idx_shift;
1943 	u8 mic_len;
1944 };
1945 
1946 /**
1947  * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1948  *
1949  * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1950  * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1951  *
1952  * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1953  * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1954  */
1955 enum set_key_cmd {
1956 	SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1957 };
1958 
1959 /**
1960  * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1961  *
1962  * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1963  *	this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1964  * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1965  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1966  * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1967  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1968  */
1969 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1970 	/* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1971 	IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1972 	IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1973 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1974 	IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1975 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1976 };
1977 
1978 /**
1979  * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1980  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1981  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1982  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1983  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1984  *	(including 80+80 MHz)
1985  *
1986  * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1987  *	correctly, the values must be sorted.
1988  */
1989 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1990 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1991 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1992 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1993 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1994 };
1995 
1996 /**
1997  * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1998  *
1999  * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
2000  * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
2001  *	Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
2002  */
2003 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
2004 	struct rcu_head rcu_head;
2005 	struct {
2006 		s8 idx;
2007 		u8 count;
2008 		u8 count_cts;
2009 		u8 count_rts;
2010 		u16 flags;
2011 	} rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
2012 };
2013 
2014 /**
2015  * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
2016  *
2017  * Used to configure txpower for station.
2018  *
2019  * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
2020  *	to the STA.
2021  * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
2022  *	will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
2023  *	%type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
2024  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
2025  *	per peer TPC.
2026  */
2027 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
2028 	s16 power;
2029 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
2030 };
2031 
2032 /**
2033  * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
2034  *
2035  * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
2036  * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
2037  * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
2038  * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
2039  * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
2040  * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
2041  *
2042  * @addr: MAC address
2043  * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
2044  * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
2045  * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2046  * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2047  * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
2048  * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities
2049  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
2050  *	that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
2051  *	Can be modified by driver.
2052  * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
2053  *	otherwise always false)
2054  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
2055  *	sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
2056  * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
2057  *	if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
2058  *	IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
2059  * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
2060  * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
2061  * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
2062  *	station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
2063  *	notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
2064  *	the station moves to associated state.
2065  * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
2066  * @rates: rate control selection table
2067  * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
2068  * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
2069  *	valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
2070  * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
2071  * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
2072  *	A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
2073  *	unlimited.
2074  * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
2075  * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
2076  * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
2077  * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration
2078  * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
2079  *	the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
2080  */
2081 struct ieee80211_sta {
2082 	u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
2083 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2084 	u16 aid;
2085 	struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
2086 	struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
2087 	struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2088 	struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa;
2089 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2090 	bool wme;
2091 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2092 	u8 max_sp;
2093 	u8 rx_nss;
2094 	enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2095 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2096 	struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2097 	bool tdls;
2098 	bool tdls_initiator;
2099 	bool mfp;
2100 	u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2101 
2102 	/**
2103 	 * @max_amsdu_len:
2104 	 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2105 	 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2106 	 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2107 	 *
2108 	 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2109 	 *   A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2110 	 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2111 	 *   size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2112 	 *
2113 	 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2114 	 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2115 	 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2116 	 */
2117 	u16 max_amsdu_len;
2118 	bool support_p2p_ps;
2119 	u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2120 	u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2121 	struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2122 
2123 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2124 
2125 	/* must be last */
2126 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2127 };
2128 
2129 /**
2130  * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2131  *
2132  * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2133  * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2134  *
2135  * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2136  * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2137  */
2138 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2139 	STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2140 };
2141 
2142 /**
2143  * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2144  *
2145  * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2146  * 	it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2147  */
2148 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2149 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2150 };
2151 
2152 /**
2153  * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2154  *
2155  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2156  * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2157  * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2158  *	%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2159  * @ac: the AC for this queue
2160  * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2161  *
2162  * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2163  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2164  */
2165 struct ieee80211_txq {
2166 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2167 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2168 	u8 tid;
2169 	u8 ac;
2170 
2171 	/* must be last */
2172 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2173 };
2174 
2175 /**
2176  * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2177  *
2178  * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2179  * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2180  * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2181  * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2182  * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2183  *
2184  * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2185  *	The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2186  *	controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2187  *	should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2188  *	will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2189  *	algorithm.
2190  *	Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2191  *	callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2192  *	the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2193  *	@use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2194  *	timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2195  *	CCK frames.
2196  *
2197  * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2198  *	Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2199  *	the FCS at the end.
2200  *
2201  * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2202  *	Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2203  *	for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2204  *	rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2205  *	to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2206  *	multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2207  *	the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2208  *
2209  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2210  *	Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2211  *	expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2212  *	If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2213  *
2214  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2215  *	Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2216  *	one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2217  *	between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2218  *
2219  * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2220  * 	Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2221  * 	Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2222  *
2223  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2224  *	Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2225  *
2226  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2227  *	Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2228  *
2229  * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2230  *	Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2231  *	stack support for dynamic PS.
2232  *
2233  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2234  *	Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2235  *
2236  * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2237  *	Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2238  *
2239  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2240  *	Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2241  *	the stack.
2242  *
2243  * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2244  *	The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2245  *	periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2246  *
2247  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2248  *	This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2249  *	dtim_period).
2250  *
2251  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2252  *	per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2253  *	the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2254  *	to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2255  *	possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2256  *	only in that case.
2257  *
2258  * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2259  *	autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2260  *	this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2261  *	stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2262  *	Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2263  *	the PS mode of connected stations.
2264  *
2265  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2266  *	setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2267  *	software.
2268  *
2269  * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2270  *	a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2271  *	active interfaces.
2272  *
2273  * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2274  *	be created.  It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2275  *	desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2276  *
2277  * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2278  *	crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2279  *	try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2280  *	the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2281  *	supported cipher suites.
2282  *
2283  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2284  *	this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2285  *	for frames.
2286  *
2287  * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2288  *	queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2289  *	for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2290  *	control for more details.
2291  *
2292  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2293  *	selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2294  *
2295  * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2296  *	P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2297  *	is supported.
2298  *
2299  * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2300  *	only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2301  *
2302  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2303  *	and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2304  *	using aggregation for such frames.)
2305  *
2306  * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2307  *	for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2308  *	is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2309  *	CSA frame.
2310  *
2311  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2312  *	or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2313  *
2314  * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2315  *	in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2316  *
2317  * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2318  *	than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2319  *
2320  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2321  *	within A-MPDU.
2322  *
2323  * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2324  *	for sent beacons.
2325  *
2326  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2327  *	station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2328  *	by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2329  *	from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2330  *
2331  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2332  *	reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2333  *	order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2334  *	timeout.
2335  *
2336  * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2337  *	which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2338  *
2339  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2340  *	A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2341  *	When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2342  *	limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2343  *	max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2344  *
2345  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2346  *	skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2347  *
2348  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2349  *	by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2350  *	drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2351  *	is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2352  *
2353  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2354  *	The stack will not do fragmentation.
2355  *	The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2356  *
2357  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2358  *	TDLS links.
2359  *
2360  * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2361  *	mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2362  *	deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2363  *	beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2364  *	virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2365  *	the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2366  *	deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2367  *
2368  * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2369  *	support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2370  *
2371  * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2372  *	course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2373  *
2374  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2375  *	extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2376  *	the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2377  *	but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2378  *	See also the documentation for that flag.
2379  *
2380  * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2381  *	MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2382  *	TXQs to start with.
2383  *
2384  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2385  *	length in tx status information
2386  *
2387  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2388  *
2389  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2390  *	only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2391  *
2392  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2393  *	aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2394  *	A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2395  *
2396  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation
2397  *	offload
2398  *
2399  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation
2400  *	offload
2401  *
2402  * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2403  */
2404 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2405 	IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2406 	IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2407 	IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2408 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2409 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2410 	IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2411 	IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2412 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2413 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2414 	IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2415 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2416 	IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2417 	IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2418 	IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2419 	IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2420 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2421 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2422 	IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2423 	IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2424 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2425 	IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2426 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2427 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2428 	IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2429 	IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2430 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2431 	IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2432 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2433 	IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2434 	IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2435 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2436 	IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2437 	IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2438 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2439 	IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2440 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2441 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2442 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2443 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2444 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2445 	IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2446 	IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2447 	IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2448 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2449 	IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2450 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2451 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2452 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2453 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2454 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD,
2455 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD,
2456 
2457 	/* keep last, obviously */
2458 	NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2459 };
2460 
2461 /**
2462  * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2463  *
2464  * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2465  * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2466  *
2467  * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2468  *	802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2469  *	members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2470  *	and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2471  *	bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2472  *
2473  * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2474  *
2475  * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2476  *	along with this structure.
2477  *
2478  * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2479  *
2480  * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2481  *	for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2482  *
2483  * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2484  *	Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2485  *
2486  * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2487  *	only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2488  *
2489  * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2490  *	that HW supports
2491  *
2492  * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2493  *	data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2494  *	queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2495  *
2496  * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2497  *	If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2498  *	set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2499  *
2500  * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2501  *	within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2502  * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2503  *	within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2504  * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2505  *	within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2506  * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2507  *	within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2508  *
2509  * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2510  *	can handle.
2511  * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2512  *	the hw can report back.
2513  * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2514  *
2515  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2516  *	sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2517  *	aggregation.
2518  *	This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2519  *	number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2520  *	it shouldn't be set.
2521  *
2522  * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2523  *	aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2524  *	advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2525  *	the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2526  *	with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2527  *	For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2528  *
2529  * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2530  *	of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2531  *
2532  * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2533  *	(if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2534  *
2535  * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2536  *	reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2537  *	include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2538  *	adding _BW is supported today.
2539  *
2540  * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2541  *	the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2542  *	Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2543  *
2544  * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2545  *
2546  * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2547  *	@units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2548  *	field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2549  *	device_timestamp.
2550  * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2551  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2552  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2553  * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2554  *	radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2555  *
2556  * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2557  *	from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2558  *	other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2559  *
2560  * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2561  *	for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2562  *	enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2563  *	Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2564  *	that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2565  *	neither enabled.
2566  *
2567  * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2568  *	deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2569  *	Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2570  *
2571  * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2572  * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2573  *	supported by HW.
2574  * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2575  *	device.
2576  *
2577  * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2578  *	them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2579  *	unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2580  *
2581  * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2582  *	refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2583  *
2584  * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2585  */
2586 struct ieee80211_hw {
2587 	struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2588 	struct wiphy *wiphy;
2589 	const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2590 	void *priv;
2591 	unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2592 	unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2593 	unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2594 	int vif_data_size;
2595 	int sta_data_size;
2596 	int chanctx_data_size;
2597 	int txq_data_size;
2598 	u16 queues;
2599 	u16 max_listen_interval;
2600 	s8 max_signal;
2601 	u8 max_rates;
2602 	u8 max_report_rates;
2603 	u8 max_rate_tries;
2604 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2605 	u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2606 	u8 max_tx_fragments;
2607 	u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2608 	u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2609 	u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2610 	struct {
2611 		int units_pos;
2612 		s16 accuracy;
2613 	} radiotap_timestamp;
2614 	netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2615 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2616 	u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2617 	u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2618 	const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2619 	u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2620 	u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2621 	u8 weight_multiplier;
2622 	u32 max_mtu;
2623 };
2624 
2625 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2626 				       enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2627 {
2628 	return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2629 }
2630 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2631 
2632 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2633 				     enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2634 {
2635 	return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2636 }
2637 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2638 
2639 /**
2640  * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2641  *
2642  * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2643  * @req: cfg80211 request.
2644  */
2645 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2646 	struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2647 
2648 	/* Keep last */
2649 	struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2650 };
2651 
2652 /**
2653  * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2654  *
2655  * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2656  * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2657  * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2658  * @status: channel-switch response status
2659  * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2660  * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2661  * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2662  * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2663  * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2664  */
2665 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2666 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2667 	struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2668 	u8 action_code;
2669 	u32 status;
2670 	u32 timestamp;
2671 	u16 switch_time;
2672 	u16 switch_timeout;
2673 	struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2674 	u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2675 };
2676 
2677 /**
2678  * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2679  *
2680  * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2681  *
2682  * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2683  * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2684  * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2685  * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2686  * is already used internally by mac80211.
2687  *
2688  * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2689  */
2690 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2691 
2692 /**
2693  * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2694  *
2695  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2696  * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2697  */
2698 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2699 {
2700 	set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2701 }
2702 
2703 /**
2704  * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2705  *
2706  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2707  * @addr: the address to set
2708  */
2709 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2710 {
2711 	memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2712 }
2713 
2714 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2715 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2716 		      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2717 {
2718 	if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2719 		return NULL;
2720 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2721 }
2722 
2723 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2724 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2725 			   const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2726 {
2727 	if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2728 		return NULL;
2729 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2730 }
2731 
2732 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2733 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2734 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2735 {
2736 	if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2737 		return NULL;
2738 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2739 }
2740 
2741 /**
2742  * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2743  * @hw: the hardware
2744  * @skb: the skb
2745  *
2746  * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure
2747  * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2748  */
2749 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2750 
2751 /**
2752  * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2753  *
2754  * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2755  * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2756  *
2757  * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2758  * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2759  * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2760  * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2761  * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2762  * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2763  * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2764  *
2765  * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2766  * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2767  * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2768  *
2769  * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2770  * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2771  * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2772  * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2773  *
2774  * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2775  * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2776  * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2777  * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2778  *
2779  * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2780  *
2781  * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2782  * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2783  * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2784  * based on the receive flags.
2785  *
2786  * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2787  * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2788  * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2789  * keys.
2790  *
2791  * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2792  * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2793  * handler.
2794  * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2795  * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2796  * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2797  * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2798  * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2799  * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2800  *
2801  * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2802  * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2803  * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2804  *
2805  * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2806  * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following
2807  * requirements:
2808  * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to
2809       mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been
2810       completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key,
2811    2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2812       at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2813    3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2814       encrypted with the new key and
2815    4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2816    Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2817  */
2818 
2819 /**
2820  * DOC: Powersave support
2821  *
2822  * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2823  *
2824  * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2825  * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2826  * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2827  * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2828  * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2829  * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2830  * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2831  * it finds traffic directed to it.
2832  *
2833  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2834  * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2835  * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2836  * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2837  * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2838  *
2839  * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2840  * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2841  * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2842  *
2843  * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2844  * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2845  * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2846  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2847  * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2848  * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2849  * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2850  *
2851  * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2852  * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2853  * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2854  * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2855  * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2856  * periods.
2857  *
2858  * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2859  * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2860  * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2861  * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2862  * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2863  * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2864  * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2865  * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2866  * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2867  * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2868  *
2869  * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2870  * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2871  * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2872  * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2873  * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2874  * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2875  *
2876  * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2877  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2878  */
2879 
2880 /**
2881  * DOC: Beacon filter support
2882  *
2883  * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2884  * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2885  * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2886  * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2887  * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2888  * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2889  * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2890  *
2891  * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2892  * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2893  * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2894  * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2895  * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2896  *
2897  * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2898  * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2899  * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2900  * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2901  *
2902  * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2903  * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2904  * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2905  * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2906  *
2907  *  - a list of information element IDs
2908  *  - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2909  *
2910  * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2911  * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2912  * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2913  * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2914  * vendor information elements.
2915  *
2916  * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2917  * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2918  *
2919  * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2920  * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2921  * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2922  * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2923  * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2924  * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2925  *
2926  *
2927  * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2928  * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2929  * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2930  * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2931  * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2932  * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2933  * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2934  * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2935  *
2936  * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2937  * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2938  * signal strength threshold checking.
2939  */
2940 
2941 /**
2942  * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2943  *
2944  * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2945  * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2946  * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2947  * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2948  *
2949  * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2950  * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2951  * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2952  * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2953  * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2954  * hardware flags.
2955  *
2956  * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2957  * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2958  * turned off otherwise.
2959  *
2960  * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2961  * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2962  * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2963  * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2964  */
2965 
2966 /**
2967  * DOC: Frame filtering
2968  *
2969  * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2970  * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2971  * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2972  * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2973  * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2974  *
2975  * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2976  * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2977  * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2978  *
2979  * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2980  * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2981  * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2982  * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2983  * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2984  * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2985  * @total_flags with the new flag states.
2986  *
2987  * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2988  * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2989  * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2990  * or dropped.
2991  *
2992  * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2993  * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2994  * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2995  * the flag, but not clear it.
2996  * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2997  * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2998  * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2999  * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
3000  * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
3001  * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
3002  * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
3003  * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
3004  */
3005 
3006 /**
3007  * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
3008  *
3009  * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
3010  * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
3011  * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
3012  *
3013  * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
3014  * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
3015  * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
3016  * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
3017  * the driver code.
3018  *
3019  * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
3020  * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
3021  * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
3022  * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
3023  * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
3024  * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
3025  * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
3026  *
3027  * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
3028  * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
3029  * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
3030  * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
3031  * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
3032  * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
3033  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
3034  * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
3035  * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
3036  * @sta_notify callback.
3037  *
3038  * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
3039  * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
3040  * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
3041  * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
3042  * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
3043  * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
3044  * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
3045  * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
3046  * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
3047  * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
3048  * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
3049  * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
3050  * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
3051  * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
3052  *
3053  * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
3054  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
3055  *
3056  * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
3057  * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
3058  * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
3059  * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
3060  * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
3061  * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
3062  * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
3063  * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
3064  * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
3065  * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
3066  * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
3067  *
3068  * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
3069  * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
3070  * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
3071  * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
3072  * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
3073  * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
3074  * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
3075  * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
3076  * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
3077  * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
3078  * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
3079  * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
3080  * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
3081  * buffers for those TIDs contain.
3082  *
3083  * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
3084  * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
3085  * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
3086  * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
3087  * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
3088  * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
3089  * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
3090  *
3091  * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
3092  * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
3093  * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
3094  * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
3095  * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
3096  *
3097  * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
3098  * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
3099  * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3100  * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3101  */
3102 
3103 /**
3104  * DOC: HW queue control
3105  *
3106  * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3107  * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3108  * was problematic for a few reasons:
3109  * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3110  * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3111  * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3112  *
3113  * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3114  * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3115  * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3116  *
3117  * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3118  * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3119  * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3120  * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3121  * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3122  * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3123  * the hardware queue.
3124  * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3125  * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3126  *
3127  * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3128  * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3129  * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3130  * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3131  * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3132  *
3133  * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3134  * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3135  * after-DTIM queue for AP:   8
3136  * off-channel queue:         9
3137  *
3138  * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3139  *   hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3140  *
3141  * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3142  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3143  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3144  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3145  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3146  *   vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3147  * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3148  *
3149  * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3150  * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3151  *
3152  * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3153  * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3154  * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3155  * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3156  */
3157 
3158 /**
3159  * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3160  *
3161  * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3162  * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3163  * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3164  * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3165  *
3166  * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3167  *	by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3168  *	multicast address.
3169  *
3170  * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3171  *	%RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3172  *
3173  * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3174  *	the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3175  *
3176  * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3177  *	to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3178  *	by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3179  *	mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3180  *	honour this flag if possible.
3181  *
3182  * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3183  *	station
3184  *
3185  * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3186  *
3187  * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3188  *
3189  * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3190  *
3191  * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames
3192  */
3193 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3194 	FIF_ALLMULTI		= 1<<1,
3195 	FIF_FCSFAIL		= 1<<2,
3196 	FIF_PLCPFAIL		= 1<<3,
3197 	FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC	= 1<<4,
3198 	FIF_CONTROL		= 1<<5,
3199 	FIF_OTHER_BSS		= 1<<6,
3200 	FIF_PSPOLL		= 1<<7,
3201 	FIF_PROBE_REQ		= 1<<8,
3202 	FIF_MCAST_ACTION	= 1<<9,
3203 };
3204 
3205 /**
3206  * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3207  *
3208  * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3209  * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3210  *
3211  * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3212  * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3213  * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3214  * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3215  *
3216  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3217  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3218  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
3219  *	call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or
3220  *	call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status
3221  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after
3222  *	ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special
3223  *	status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
3224  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3225  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3226  *	queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3227  *	driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3228  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3229  *	called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3230  *	ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3231  *	session is gone and removes the station.
3232  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3233  *	but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3234  *	now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3235  *	should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3236  */
3237 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3238 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3239 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3240 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3241 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3242 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3243 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3244 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3245 };
3246 
3247 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
3248 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2
3249 
3250 /**
3251  * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3252  *
3253  * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3254  * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3255  * @tid: tid of the BA session
3256  * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3257  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3258  *	actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3259  * @buf_size: reorder buffer size  (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3260  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3261  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3262  * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3263  *	valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3264  * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3265  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3266  */
3267 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3268 	enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3269 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3270 	u16 tid;
3271 	u16 ssn;
3272 	u16 buf_size;
3273 	bool amsdu;
3274 	u16 timeout;
3275 };
3276 
3277 /**
3278  * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3279  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3280  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3281  *	frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3282  */
3283 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3284 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3285 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3286 };
3287 
3288 /**
3289  * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3290  *
3291  * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3292  *	to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3293  *	information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3294  *	flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3295  * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3296  * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3297  *	changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3298  *	the peer.
3299  * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3300  *	by the peer
3301  */
3302 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3303 	IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED		= BIT(0),
3304 	IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED	= BIT(1),
3305 	IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED	= BIT(2),
3306 	IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED	= BIT(3),
3307 };
3308 
3309 /**
3310  * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3311  *
3312  * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3313  * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3314  * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa).
3315  * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3316  * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3317  *
3318  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3319  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3320  *	for sending management frames offchannel.
3321  */
3322 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3323 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3324 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3325 };
3326 
3327 /**
3328  * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type
3329  *
3330  * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3331  * reconfiguration type was completed.
3332  *
3333  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3334  *	(also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3335  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3336  *	of wowlan configuration)
3337  */
3338 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3339 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3340 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3341 };
3342 
3343 /**
3344  * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3345  *
3346  * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3347  * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3348  * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3349  *
3350  * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3351  *	skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3352  *	The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3353  *	configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3354  *	preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3355  *	Must be atomic.
3356  *
3357  * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3358  *	is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3359  *	frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3360  *	Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3361  *	or zero.
3362  *	When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3363  *	to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3364  *	is added.
3365  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3366  *
3367  * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3368  *	is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3369  *	it must turn off frame reception.)
3370  *	May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3371  *	an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3372  *	you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3373  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3374  *
3375  * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3376  *	stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3377  *	ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3378  *	configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3379  *	reconfigured at resume time.
3380  *	The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3381  *	wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3382  *	supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3383  *	must return 1 from this function.
3384  *
3385  * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3386  *	now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3387  *	functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3388  *	to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3389  *	will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3390  *
3391  * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3392  *	modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3393  *	supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3394  *	in suspend().
3395  *
3396  * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3397  *	enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3398  *	and @stop must be implemented.
3399  *	The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3400  *	the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3401  *	interface is given in the conf parameter.
3402  *	The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3403  *	negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3404  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3405  *
3406  * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3407  *	is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3408  *	switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3409  *	Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3410  *	found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3411  *
3412  * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3413  *	The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3414  *	and no monitor interfaces are present.
3415  *	When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3416  *	must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3417  *	the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3418  *	MAC address of the device going away.
3419  *	Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3420  *
3421  * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3422  *	function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3423  *	This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3424  *	if it does. The callback can sleep.
3425  *
3426  * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3427  *	parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3428  *	level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3429  *	This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3430  *	for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3431  *	of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3432  *	can sleep.
3433  *
3434  * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3435  *	This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3436  *	to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3437  *
3438  * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3439  *	See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3440  *	This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3441  *
3442  * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3443  *	This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3444  *	should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3445  *	of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3446  *	which flags are changed.
3447  *	This callback can sleep.
3448  *
3449  * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3450  * 	must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3451  *
3452  * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3453  *	This callback is only called between add_interface and
3454  *	remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3455  *	is enabled.
3456  *	Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3457  *	The callback can sleep.
3458  *
3459  * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3460  * 	This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3461  * 	which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3462  *	The callback must be atomic.
3463  *
3464  * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3465  *	host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3466  *	necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3467  *	After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3468  *	userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3469  *
3470  * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3471  *	WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3472  *	offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3473  *
3474  * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3475  *	the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3476  *	configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3477  *	registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3478  *	that power save is disabled.
3479  *	The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3480  *	entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3481  *	at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3482  *	(extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3483  *	When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3484  *	note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3485  *	any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3486  *	This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3487  *	this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3488  *	software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3489  *	capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3490  *	advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3491  *	The callback can sleep.
3492  *
3493  * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3494  *	The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3495  *	but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3496  *	ieee80211_scan_completed().
3497  *	This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3498  *	scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3499  *	The callback can sleep.
3500  *
3501  * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3502  *	specific intervals.  The driver must call the
3503  *	ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3504  *	This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3505  *
3506  * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3507  *	In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3508  *
3509  * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3510  *	is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3511  *	The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3512  *	the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3513  *	can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3514  *
3515  * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3516  *	software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3517  *	this notification.
3518  *	The callback can sleep.
3519  *
3520  * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3521  * 	Returns zero if statistics are available.
3522  *	The callback can sleep.
3523  *
3524  * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3525  *	IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3526  *	IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3527  *	The callback must be atomic.
3528  *
3529  * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3530  *	if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3531  *	stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3532  *	should be set as well.
3533  *	The callback can sleep.
3534  *
3535  * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3536  *	The callback can sleep.
3537  *
3538  * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3539  *	AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3540  *
3541  * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3542  *	station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3543  *	returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3544  *	no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3545  *	the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3546  *	This callback can sleep.
3547  *
3548  * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3549  *	when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3550  *	should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3551  *	callback can sleep.
3552  *
3553  * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3554  *	associated station, AP,  IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3555  *	in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3556  *	%IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3557  *
3558  * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx
3559  *	power for the station.
3560  *	This callback can sleep.
3561  *
3562  * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3563  *	station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3564  *	This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3565  *	It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3566  *	up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3567  *	isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3568  *	period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3569  *	See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3570  *	The callback can sleep.
3571  *
3572  * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3573  *	synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3574  *	pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3575  *	the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3576  *	in @sta_state.
3577  *	The callback can sleep.
3578  *
3579  * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3580  *	used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3581  *	from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3582  *	in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3583  *	uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3584  *	otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3585  *	Must be atomic.
3586  * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3587  *	is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3588  *	the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3589  *
3590  * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3591  *	filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3592  *	let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3593  *	the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3594  *	all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3595  *	Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3596  *	The callback can sleep.
3597  *
3598  * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3599  *	bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3600  *	Returns a negative error code on failure.
3601  *	The callback can sleep.
3602  *
3603  * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3604  *	this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3605  *	required function.
3606  *	The callback can sleep.
3607  *
3608  * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3609  *	Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3610  *	required function.
3611  *	The callback can sleep.
3612  *
3613  * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3614  *	firmware/hardware.  Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3615  *	calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3616  *	as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3617  *	The callback can sleep.
3618  *
3619  * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3620  *	with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3621  *	function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3622  *	TSF synchronization.
3623  *	The callback can sleep.
3624  *
3625  * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3626  *	This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3627  *	used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3628  *	Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3629  *	The callback can sleep.
3630  *
3631  * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3632  *
3633  * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3634  *	need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3635  *	and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3636  *	The callback can sleep.
3637  *
3638  * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3639  *	in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3640  *	accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3641  *	estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3642  *	coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3643  *
3644  * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3645  *	be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3646  * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3647  *
3648  * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3649  *	that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3650  *	of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3651  *	use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3652  *	If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3653  *	Note that vif can be NULL.
3654  *	The callback can sleep.
3655  *
3656  * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3657  *	switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3658  *	callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3659  *	completion of the channel switch.
3660  *
3661  * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3662  *	Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3663  *	reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3664  *	(also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3665  *
3666  * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3667  *
3668  * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3669  *	call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3670  *	that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3671  *	offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3672  *	normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3673  *	duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3674  *	ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3675  *	Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3676  *	must be accepted in this case.
3677  *	This callback may sleep.
3678  * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3679  *	aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3680  *
3681  * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3682  *
3683  * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3684  *
3685  * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3686  *	queues before entering power save.
3687  *
3688  * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3689  *	when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3690  *	The callback can sleep.
3691  * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3692  *	&enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3693  *	The callback must be atomic.
3694  *
3695  * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3696  *	parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3697  *	sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3698  *	to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3699  *	Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3700  *	if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3701  *	the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3702  *	the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3703  *	more-data bit must always be set.
3704  *	The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3705  *	from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3706  *	In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3707  *	@num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3708  *	this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3709  *	on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3710  *	period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3711  *	responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3712  *	In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3713  *	bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3714  *	at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3715  *	setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3716  *	service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3717  *	on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3718  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3719  *	This callback must be atomic.
3720  * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3721  *	to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3722  *	via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3723  *	released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3724  *	and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3725  *	frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3726  *	them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3727  *	on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3728  *	bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3729  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3730  *	The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3731  *	frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3732  *	This callback must be atomic.
3733  *
3734  * @get_et_sset_count:  Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3735  *
3736  * @get_et_stats:  Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3737  *
3738  * @get_et_strings:  Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3739  *	and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3740  *
3741  * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3742  *	before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3743  *	bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3744  *	yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3745  *	transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3746  *	powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3747  *	management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3748  *	driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3749  *	and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3750  *	For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3751  *	would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3752  *	frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3753  *	The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3754  *	mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3755  *      If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the
3756  *      duration for which the operation is requested.
3757  *	The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3758  *
3759  * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3760  *	a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3761  *	channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3762  *	setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3763  *	mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3764  *	discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3765  *	2 * (DTIM period).
3766  *	The callback is optional and can sleep.
3767  *
3768  * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3769  *	This callback may sleep.
3770  * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3771  *	This callback may sleep.
3772  * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3773  *	may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3774  *	channel context with different settings
3775  *	This callback may sleep.
3776  * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3777  *	to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3778  *	This callback may sleep.
3779  * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3780  *	unbound from vif.
3781  *	This callback may sleep.
3782  * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3783  *	another, as specified in the list of
3784  *	@ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3785  *	to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3786  *	This callback may sleep.
3787  *
3788  * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3789  *	information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3790  *	context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3791  *	software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3792  *	just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3793  *	disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3794  * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3795  *
3796  * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3797  *	during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3798  *	This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3799  *	indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3800  *	This callback may sleep.
3801  *
3802  * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3803  *	Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3804  *	This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3805  *
3806  * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3807  *	Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3808  *	function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3809  *	decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3810  *	ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3811  *	get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3812  *	1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3813  *	transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3814  *	If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3815  *	since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3816  * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3817  *	before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3818  *	gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3819  *	the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3820  * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3821  *	after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3822  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3823  * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3824  *	when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
3825  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3826  * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
3827  *	when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
3828  *	CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3829  * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3830  *	information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3831  *	channel context is bound before this is called.
3832  * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3833  *
3834  * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3835  *	specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3836  *	if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3837  *
3838  * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3839  *	and hardware limits.
3840  *
3841  * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3842  *	is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3843  *	and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3844  *	driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3845  *	the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3846  *	The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3847  *	optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3848  * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3849  *	peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3850  * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3851  *	response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3852  *	parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3853  *	an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3854  *	response template is provided, together with the location of the
3855  *	switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3856  *	the function call.
3857  *
3858  * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3859  * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3860  *	synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3861  *	pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3862  *	currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3863  *
3864  * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3865  * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3866  * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3867  *	contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3868  *	are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3869  *	The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3870  *	some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3871  *	changed parameters.
3872  * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3873  *	cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3874  *	this call.
3875  * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3876  *	ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3877  *	NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3878  * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3879  *	aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3880  *	between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3881  *	skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3882  * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3883  *	Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3884  *
3885  * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3886  * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3887  * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep.
3888  * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer.
3889  *	This callback may sleep.
3890  * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags
3891  *	This callback may sleep.
3892  * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using
3893  *	4-address mode
3894  * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings.
3895  * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed
3896  *	to use rx decapsulation offload
3897  */
3898 struct ieee80211_ops {
3899 	void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3900 		   struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3901 		   struct sk_buff *skb);
3902 	int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3903 	void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3904 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
3905 	int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3906 	int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3907 	void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3908 #endif
3909 	int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3910 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3911 	int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3912 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3913 				enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3914 	void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3915 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3916 	int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3917 	void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3918 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3919 				 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3920 				 u32 changed);
3921 
3922 	int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3923 	void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3924 
3925 	u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3926 				 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3927 	void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3928 				 unsigned int changed_flags,
3929 				 unsigned int *total_flags,
3930 				 u64 multicast);
3931 	void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3932 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3933 				    unsigned int filter_flags,
3934 				    unsigned int changed_flags);
3935 	int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3936 		       bool set);
3937 	int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3938 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3939 		       struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3940 	void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3941 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3942 				struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3943 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3944 				u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
3945 	void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3946 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3947 			       struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
3948 	void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3949 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
3950 	int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3951 		       struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
3952 	void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3953 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3954 	int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3955 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3956 				struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
3957 				struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
3958 	int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3959 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3960 	void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3961 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3962 			      const u8 *mac_addr);
3963 	void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3964 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3965 	int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3966 			 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
3967 	void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3968 			    struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3969 			    struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3970 	int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3971 	int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3972 	int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3973 		       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3974 	int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3975 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3976 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3977 	void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3978 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3979 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3980 				struct dentry *dir);
3981 #endif
3982 	void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3983 			enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3984 	int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3985 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3986 			     struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3987 	int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3988 			 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3989 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3990 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
3991 	void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3992 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3993 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3994 	void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3995 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3996 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3997 			      u32 changed);
3998 	void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3999 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4000 				    struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4001 	void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4002 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4003 			       struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4004 			       struct station_info *sinfo);
4005 	int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4006 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
4007 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
4008 	u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4009 	void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4010 			u64 tsf);
4011 	void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4012 			   s64 offset);
4013 	void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4014 	int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4015 
4016 	/**
4017 	 * @ampdu_action:
4018 	 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
4019 	 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
4020 	 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
4021 	 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
4022 	 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
4023 	 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
4024 	 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
4025 	 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
4026 	 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
4027 	 *
4028 	 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
4029 	 * - ``RX:  2....7`` (lost frame #1)
4030 	 * - ``TX:        8..1...``
4031 	 *
4032 	 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
4033 	 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
4034 	 *
4035 	 * - ``TX:        1   or``
4036 	 * - ``TX:        18  or``
4037 	 * - ``TX:        81``
4038 	 *
4039 	 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
4040 	 *
4041 	 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
4042 	 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
4043 	 * if the session can start immediately.
4044 	 *
4045 	 * The callback can sleep.
4046 	 */
4047 	int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4048 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4049 			    struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
4050 	int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
4051 		struct survey_info *survey);
4052 	void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4053 	void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
4054 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
4055 	int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4056 			    void *data, int len);
4057 	int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
4058 			     struct netlink_callback *cb,
4059 			     void *data, int len);
4060 #endif
4061 	void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4062 		      u32 queues, bool drop);
4063 	void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4064 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4065 			       struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4066 	int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
4067 	int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
4068 
4069 	int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4070 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4071 				 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
4072 				 int duration,
4073 				 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
4074 	int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4075 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4076 	int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
4077 	void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4078 			      u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
4079 	bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4080 	int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4081 				const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
4082 	void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4083 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4084 			       const struct ieee80211_event *event);
4085 
4086 	void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4087 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4088 				      u16 tids, int num_frames,
4089 				      enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4090 				      bool more_data);
4091 	void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4092 					struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4093 					u16 tids, int num_frames,
4094 					enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4095 					bool more_data);
4096 
4097 	int	(*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4098 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
4099 	void	(*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4100 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4101 				struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
4102 	void	(*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4103 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4104 				  u32 sset, u8 *data);
4105 
4106 	void	(*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4107 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4108 				  u16 duration);
4109 
4110 	void	(*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4111 					     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4112 
4113 	int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4114 			   struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4115 	void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4116 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4117 	void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4118 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
4119 			       u32 changed);
4120 	int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4121 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4122 				  struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4123 	void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4124 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4125 				     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4126 	int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4127 				  struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4128 				  int n_vifs,
4129 				  enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4130 
4131 	void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4132 				  enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4133 
4134 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4135 	void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4136 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4137 				 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4138 #endif
4139 	void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4140 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4141 				      struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4142 	int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4143 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4144 				  struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4145 
4146 	int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4147 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4148 	void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4149 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4150 	void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4151 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4152 					 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4153 
4154 	int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4155 	void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4156 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4157 				       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4158 	int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4159 			   int *dbm);
4160 
4161 	int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4162 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4163 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4164 				   struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4165 				   struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4166 	void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4167 					   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4168 					   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4169 	void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4170 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4171 					 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4172 
4173 	void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4174 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4175 	void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4176 
4177 	int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4178 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4179 			 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4180 	int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4181 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4182 	int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4183 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4184 			       struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4185 	int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4186 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4187 			    const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4188 	void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4189 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4190 			    u8 instance_id);
4191 	bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4192 				       struct sk_buff *head,
4193 				       struct sk_buff *skb);
4194 	int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4195 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4196 				       struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4197 	int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4198 			  struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4199 	void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4200 			   struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4201 	int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4202 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4203 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4204 			      struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf);
4205 	int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4206 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4207 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids);
4208 	void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4209 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4210 	void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4211 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4212 	int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4213 			     const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar);
4214 	void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4215 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4216 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4217 };
4218 
4219 /**
4220  * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4221  *
4222  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4223  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4224  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4225  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4226  * @priv_data_len.
4227  *
4228  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4229  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4230  * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4231  *	NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4232  *
4233  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4234  */
4235 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4236 					   const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4237 					   const char *requested_name);
4238 
4239 /**
4240  * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4241  *
4242  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4243  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4244  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4245  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4246  * @priv_data_len.
4247  *
4248  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4249  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4250  *
4251  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4252  */
4253 static inline
4254 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4255 					const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4256 {
4257 	return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4258 }
4259 
4260 /**
4261  * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4262  *
4263  * You must call this function before any other functions in
4264  * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4265  * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4266  *
4267  * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4268  *
4269  * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4270  */
4271 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4272 
4273 /**
4274  * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4275  * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4276  * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4277  *	(full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4278  */
4279 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4280 	int throughput;
4281 	int blink_time;
4282 };
4283 
4284 /**
4285  * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4286  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4287  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4288  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4289  *	interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4290  */
4291 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4292 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO		= BIT(0),
4293 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK		= BIT(1),
4294 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED	= BIT(2),
4295 };
4296 
4297 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4298 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4299 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4300 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4301 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4302 const char *
4303 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4304 				   unsigned int flags,
4305 				   const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4306 				   unsigned int blink_table_len);
4307 #endif
4308 /**
4309  * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4310  *
4311  * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4312  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4313  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4314  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4315  *
4316  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4317  *
4318  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4319  */
4320 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4321 {
4322 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4323 	return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4324 #else
4325 	return NULL;
4326 #endif
4327 }
4328 
4329 /**
4330  * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4331  *
4332  * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4333  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4334  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4335  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4336  *
4337  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4338  *
4339  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4340  */
4341 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4342 {
4343 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4344 	return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4345 #else
4346 	return NULL;
4347 #endif
4348 }
4349 
4350 /**
4351  * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4352  *
4353  * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4354  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4355  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4356  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4357  *
4358  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4359  *
4360  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4361  */
4362 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4363 {
4364 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4365 	return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4366 #else
4367 	return NULL;
4368 #endif
4369 }
4370 
4371 /**
4372  * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4373  *
4374  * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4375  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4376  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4377  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4378  *
4379  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4380  *
4381  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4382  */
4383 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4384 {
4385 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4386 	return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4387 #else
4388 	return NULL;
4389 #endif
4390 }
4391 
4392 /**
4393  * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4394  * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4395  * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4396  * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4397  * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4398  *
4399  * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4400  * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4401  *
4402  * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4403  */
4404 static inline const char *
4405 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4406 				 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4407 				 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4408 {
4409 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4410 	return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4411 						  blink_table_len);
4412 #else
4413 	return NULL;
4414 #endif
4415 }
4416 
4417 /**
4418  * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4419  *
4420  * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4421  * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4422  *
4423  * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4424  */
4425 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4426 
4427 /**
4428  * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4429  *
4430  * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4431  * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4432  * before calling this function.
4433  *
4434  * @hw: the hardware to free
4435  */
4436 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4437 
4438 /**
4439  * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4440  *
4441  * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4442  * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4443  * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4444  * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4445  * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4446  * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4447  *
4448  * @hw: the hardware to restart
4449  */
4450 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4451 
4452 /**
4453  * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list
4454  *
4455  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4456  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4457  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4458  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4459  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4460  *
4461  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4462  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4463  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4464  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4465  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4466  *
4467  * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock
4468  *
4469  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4470  * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4471  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4472  * @list: the destination list
4473  */
4474 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4475 		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list);
4476 
4477 /**
4478  * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4479  *
4480  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4481  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4482  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4483  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4484  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4485  *
4486  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4487  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4488  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4489  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4490  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4491  *
4492  * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4493  *
4494  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4495  * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4496  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4497  * @napi: the NAPI context
4498  */
4499 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4500 		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4501 
4502 /**
4503  * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4504  *
4505  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4506  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4507  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4508  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4509  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4510  *
4511  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4512  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4513  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4514  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4515  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4516  *
4517  * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4518  *
4519  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4520  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4521  */
4522 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4523 {
4524 	ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4525 }
4526 
4527 /**
4528  * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4529  *
4530  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4531  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4532  *
4533  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4534  * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4535  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4536  *
4537  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4538  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4539  */
4540 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4541 
4542 /**
4543  * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4544  *
4545  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4546  * (internally disables bottom halves).
4547  *
4548  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4549  * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4550  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4551  *
4552  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4553  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4554  */
4555 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4556 				   struct sk_buff *skb)
4557 {
4558 	local_bh_disable();
4559 	ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4560 	local_bh_enable();
4561 }
4562 
4563 /**
4564  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4565  *
4566  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4567  * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4568  * entering/leaving PS mode.
4569  *
4570  * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4571  *
4572  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4573  * each other.
4574  *
4575  * @sta: currently connected sta
4576  * @start: start or stop PS
4577  *
4578  * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4579  */
4580 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4581 
4582 /**
4583  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4584  *                                  (in process context)
4585  *
4586  * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4587  * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4588  * applies.
4589  *
4590  * @sta: currently connected sta
4591  * @start: start or stop PS
4592  *
4593  * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4594  */
4595 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4596 						  bool start)
4597 {
4598 	int ret;
4599 
4600 	local_bh_disable();
4601 	ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4602 	local_bh_enable();
4603 
4604 	return ret;
4605 }
4606 
4607 /**
4608  * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4609  * @sta: currently connected station
4610  *
4611  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4612  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4613  * connected station was received.
4614  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4615  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4616  * be serialized.
4617  */
4618 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4619 
4620 /**
4621  * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4622  * @sta: currently connected station
4623  * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4624  *
4625  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4626  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4627  * from a connected station was received.
4628  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4629  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4630  * serialized.
4631  * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4632  * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4633  * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4634  * checks.
4635  */
4636 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4637 
4638 /*
4639  * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4640  * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4641  */
4642 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM	ALIGN(14, 4)
4643 
4644 /**
4645  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4646  * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4647  * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4648  * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4649  *
4650  * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4651  * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4652  * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4653  *
4654  * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4655  * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4656  * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4657  * call! Beware of the locking!)
4658  *
4659  * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4660  * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4661  * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4662  * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4663  * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4664  * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4665  *
4666  * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4667  * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4668  * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4669  * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4670  * use this API.
4671  */
4672 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4673 				u8 tid, bool buffered);
4674 
4675 /**
4676  * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4677  *
4678  * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4679  * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4680  * rate selection table for the station entry.
4681  *
4682  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4683  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4684  * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4685  * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4686  * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4687  */
4688 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4689 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4690 			    struct sk_buff *skb,
4691 			    struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4692 			    int max_rates);
4693 
4694 /**
4695  * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4696  *
4697  * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4698  * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4699  * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4700  * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4701  * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4702  * slow stations to starve).
4703  *
4704  * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4705  * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4706  */
4707 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4708 					   u32 thr);
4709 
4710 /**
4711  * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4712  *
4713  * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4714  * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4715  * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4716  *
4717  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4718  * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4719  * @info: tx status information
4720  */
4721 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4722 			      struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4723 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4724 
4725 /**
4726  * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4727  *
4728  * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4729  * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4730  * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4731  *
4732  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4733  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4734  * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4735  * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4736  * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4737  *
4738  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4739  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4740  */
4741 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4742 			 struct sk_buff *skb);
4743 
4744 /**
4745  * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4746  *
4747  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4748  * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4749  * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4750  *
4751  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4752  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4753  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4754  *
4755  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4756  * @status: tx status information
4757  */
4758 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4759 			     struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4760 
4761 /**
4762  * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4763  *
4764  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4765  * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4766  * specific skbs.
4767  *
4768  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4769  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4770  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4771  *
4772  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4773  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4774  *	(NULL for multicast packets)
4775  * @info: tx status information
4776  */
4777 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4778 					     struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4779 					     struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4780 {
4781 	struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4782 		.sta = sta,
4783 		.info = info,
4784 	};
4785 
4786 	ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4787 }
4788 
4789 /**
4790  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4791  *
4792  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4793  *
4794  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4795  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4796  * for a single hardware.
4797  *
4798  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4799  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4800  */
4801 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4802 					  struct sk_buff *skb)
4803 {
4804 	local_bh_disable();
4805 	ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4806 	local_bh_enable();
4807 }
4808 
4809 /**
4810  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4811  *
4812  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4813  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4814  *
4815  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4816  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4817  *
4818  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4819  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4820  */
4821 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4822 				 struct sk_buff *skb);
4823 
4824 /**
4825  * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format
4826  *
4827  * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit
4828  * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which
4829  * are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap
4830  * 802.11 frames.
4831  *
4832  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4833  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all
4834  * calls in the same tx status family.
4835  *
4836  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4837  * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted
4838  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4839  */
4840 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4841 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4842 			       struct sk_buff *skb);
4843 
4844 /**
4845  * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4846  *
4847  * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4848  * connected STA.
4849  *
4850  * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4851  * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4852  */
4853 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4854 
4855 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4856 
4857 /**
4858  * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4859  * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4860  * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4861  * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4862  *	to countdown counters.  This array can contain zero values which
4863  *	should be ignored.
4864  */
4865 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4866 	u16 tim_offset;
4867 	u16 tim_length;
4868 
4869 	u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM];
4870 };
4871 
4872 /**
4873  * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4874  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4875  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4876  * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4877  *	receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4878  *
4879  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4880  * obtain the beacon template.
4881  *
4882  * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4883  * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4884  * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4885  * applicable, the CSA count.
4886  *
4887  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4888  *
4889  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4890  */
4891 struct sk_buff *
4892 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4893 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4894 			      struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4895 
4896 /**
4897  * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4898  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4899  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4900  * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4901  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4902  * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4903  *	(including the ID and length bytes!).
4904  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4905  *
4906  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4907  * obtain the beacon frame.
4908  *
4909  * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4910  * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4911  * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4912  * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4913  *
4914  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4915  *
4916  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4917  */
4918 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4919 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4920 					 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4921 
4922 /**
4923  * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4924  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4925  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4926  *
4927  * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4928  *
4929  * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4930  */
4931 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4932 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4933 {
4934 	return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4935 }
4936 
4937 /**
4938  * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown
4939  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4940  *
4941  * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4942  * This function is called implicitly when
4943  * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4944  * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4945  * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown.
4946  *
4947  * Return: new countdown value
4948  */
4949 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4950 
4951 /**
4952  * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown
4953  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4954  * @counter: the new value for the counter
4955  *
4956  * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be
4957  * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
4958  *
4959  * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(),
4960  * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
4961  */
4962 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
4963 
4964 /**
4965  * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4966  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4967  *
4968  * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
4969  * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
4970  * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4971  */
4972 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4973 
4974 /**
4975  * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1
4976  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4977  *
4978  * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero.
4979  */
4980 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4981 
4982 /**
4983  * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4984  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4985  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4986  *
4987  * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4988  * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4989  *
4990  * Can only be called in AP mode.
4991  *
4992  * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
4993  */
4994 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4995 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4996 
4997 /**
4998  * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4999  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5000  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5001  *
5002  * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
5003  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5004  * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
5005  *
5006  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5007  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
5008  *
5009  * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
5010  */
5011 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5012 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5013 
5014 /**
5015  * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
5016  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5017  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5018  * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
5019  *	if at all possible
5020  *
5021  * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
5022  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5023  * BSSID and address is used.
5024  *
5025  * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
5026  * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
5027  *
5028  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5029  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
5030  *
5031  * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
5032  */
5033 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5034 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5035 				       bool qos_ok);
5036 
5037 /**
5038  * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5039  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5040  * @src_addr: source MAC address
5041  * @ssid: SSID buffer
5042  * @ssid_len: length of SSID
5043  * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
5044  *
5045  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5046  * hardware.
5047  *
5048  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5049  */
5050 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5051 				       const u8 *src_addr,
5052 				       const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
5053 				       size_t tailroom);
5054 
5055 /**
5056  * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
5057  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5058  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5059  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5060  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5061  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5062  * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
5063  *
5064  * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5065  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5066  * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5067  * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
5068  */
5069 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5070 		       const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5071 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5072 		       struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
5073 
5074 /**
5075  * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
5076  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5077  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5078  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5079  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5080  *
5081  * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5082  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5083  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5084  *
5085  * Return: The duration.
5086  */
5087 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5088 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
5089 			      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5090 
5091 /**
5092  * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
5093  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5094  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5095  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5096  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5097  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5098  * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
5099  *
5100  * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5101  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5102  * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5103  * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
5104  */
5105 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5106 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5107 			     const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5108 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5109 			     struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
5110 
5111 /**
5112  * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
5113  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5114  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5115  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5116  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5117  *
5118  * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5119  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5120  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5121  *
5122  * Return: The duration.
5123  */
5124 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5125 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5126 				    size_t frame_len,
5127 				    const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5128 
5129 /**
5130  * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
5131  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5132  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5133  * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
5134  * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
5135  * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
5136  *
5137  * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
5138  * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
5139  *
5140  * Return: The duration.
5141  */
5142 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5143 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5144 					enum nl80211_band band,
5145 					size_t frame_len,
5146 					struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
5147 
5148 /**
5149  * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
5150  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5151  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5152  *
5153  * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
5154  * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
5155  * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
5156  * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
5157  * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
5158  *
5159  * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
5160  * frames are available.
5161  *
5162  * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
5163  * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
5164  * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
5165  * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
5166  * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
5167  * use common code for all beacons.
5168  */
5169 struct sk_buff *
5170 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5171 
5172 /**
5173  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
5174  *
5175  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
5176  *
5177  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5178  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5179  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5180  */
5181 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5182 			       u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5183 
5184 /**
5185  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5186  *
5187  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5188  * from the given packet.
5189  *
5190  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5191  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5192  *	with this P1K
5193  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5194  */
5195 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5196 					  struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5197 {
5198 	struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5199 	const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5200 	u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5201 
5202 	ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5203 }
5204 
5205 /**
5206  * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5207  *
5208  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5209  * and transmitter address.
5210  *
5211  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5212  * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5213  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5214  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5215  */
5216 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5217 			       const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5218 
5219 /**
5220  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5221  *
5222  * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5223  * in the packet.
5224  *
5225  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5226  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5227  *	encrypted with this key
5228  * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5229  */
5230 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5231 			    struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5232 
5233 /**
5234  * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5235  *
5236  * @pos: start of crypto header
5237  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5238  * @pn: PN to add
5239  *
5240  * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5241  * the packet payload)
5242  *
5243  * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5244  * point to the crypto header)
5245  */
5246 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5247 
5248 /**
5249  * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5250  *
5251  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5252  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5253  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5254  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5255  * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5256  *
5257  * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5258  * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5259  * by the device and not by mac80211.
5260  *
5261  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5262  * can be done concurrently.
5263  */
5264 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5265 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5266 
5267 /**
5268  * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5269  *
5270  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5271  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5272  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5273  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5274  * @seq: new sequence data
5275  *
5276  * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5277  * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5278  * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5279  * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5280  *
5281  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5282  * can be done concurrently.
5283  */
5284 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5285 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5286 
5287 /**
5288  * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5289  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5290  *
5291  * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5292  * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5293  * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5294  *
5295  * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5296  * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5297  */
5298 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5299 
5300 /**
5301  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5302  * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5303  * @keyconf: new key data
5304  *
5305  * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5306  * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5307  * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5308  *
5309  * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5310  * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5311  * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5312  * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5313  *
5314  * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5315  * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5316  * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5317  * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5318  * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5319  * of the reconfiguration.
5320  *
5321  * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5322  * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5323  *
5324  * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5325  * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5326  * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5327  * the key that's being replaced.
5328  */
5329 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5330 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5331 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5332 
5333 /**
5334  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5335  * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5336  * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5337  * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5338  * @gfp: allocation flags
5339  */
5340 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5341 				const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5342 
5343 /**
5344  * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key
5345  *
5346  * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5347  * at the same time.
5348  *
5349  * @keyconf: the key in question
5350  */
5351 void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5352 
5353 /**
5354  * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key
5355  *
5356  * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5357  * at the same time.
5358  *
5359  * @keyconf: the key in question
5360  */
5361 void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5362 
5363 /**
5364  * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5365  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5366  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5367  *
5368  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5369  */
5370 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5371 
5372 /**
5373  * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5374  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5375  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5376  *
5377  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5378  */
5379 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5380 
5381 /**
5382  * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5383  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5384  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5385  *
5386  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5387  *
5388  * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5389  */
5390 
5391 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5392 
5393 /**
5394  * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5395  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5396  *
5397  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5398  */
5399 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5400 
5401 /**
5402  * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5403  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5404  *
5405  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5406  */
5407 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5408 
5409 /**
5410  * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5411  *
5412  * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5413  * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5414  * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5415  * any context, including hardirq context.
5416  *
5417  * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5418  * @info: information about the completed scan
5419  */
5420 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5421 			      struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5422 
5423 /**
5424  * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5425  *
5426  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5427  * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5428  *
5429  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5430  */
5431 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5432 
5433 /**
5434  * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5435  *
5436  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5437  * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5438  * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5439  * while associating, for instance.
5440  *
5441  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5442  */
5443 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5444 
5445 /**
5446  * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5447  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5448  *	been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5449  *	reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5450  *	interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5451  *	haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5452  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5453  *	interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5454  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5455  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA
5456  *	is not in the driver.  This may fix crashes during firmware recovery
5457  *	for instance.
5458  */
5459 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5460 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL	= 0,
5461 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL	= BIT(0),
5462 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE	= BIT(1),
5463 	IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER	= BIT(2),
5464 };
5465 
5466 /**
5467  * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5468  *
5469  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5470  * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5471  * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5472  * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5473  *
5474  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5475  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5476  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5477  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5478  */
5479 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5480 				  void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5481 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5482 				  void *data);
5483 
5484 /**
5485  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5486  *
5487  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5488  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5489  * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5490  * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5491  * be used.
5492  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5493  *
5494  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5495  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5496  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5497  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5498  */
5499 static inline void
5500 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5501 				    void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5502 						     struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5503 				    void *data)
5504 {
5505 	ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5506 				     iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5507 				     iterator, data);
5508 }
5509 
5510 /**
5511  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5512  *
5513  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5514  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5515  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5516  * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5517  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5518  *
5519  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5520  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5521  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5522  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5523  */
5524 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5525 						u32 iter_flags,
5526 						void (*iterator)(void *data,
5527 						    u8 *mac,
5528 						    struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5529 						void *data);
5530 
5531 /**
5532  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces
5533  *
5534  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5535  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5536  * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
5537  *
5538  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5539  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5540  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5541  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5542  */
5543 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5544 					     u32 iter_flags,
5545 					     void (*iterator)(void *data,
5546 						u8 *mac,
5547 						struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5548 					     void *data);
5549 
5550 /**
5551  * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5552  *
5553  * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5554  * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5555  * function for them.
5556  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5557  *
5558  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5559  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5560  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5561  */
5562 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5563 				       void (*iterator)(void *data,
5564 						struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5565 				       void *data);
5566 /**
5567  * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5568  *
5569  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5570  * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5571  *
5572  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5573  * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5574  */
5575 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5576 
5577 /**
5578  * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5579  *
5580  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5581  * workqueue.
5582  *
5583  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5584  * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5585  * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5586  */
5587 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5588 				  struct delayed_work *dwork,
5589 				  unsigned long delay);
5590 
5591 /**
5592  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5593  * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5594  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5595  * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5596  *
5597  * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5598  *
5599  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5600  * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5601  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5602  */
5603 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5604 				  u16 timeout);
5605 
5606 /**
5607  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5608  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5609  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5610  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5611  *
5612  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5613  * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5614  * from any context.
5615  */
5616 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5617 				      u16 tid);
5618 
5619 /**
5620  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5621  * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5622  * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5623  *
5624  * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5625  *
5626  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5627  * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5628  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5629  */
5630 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5631 
5632 /**
5633  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5634  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5635  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5636  * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5637  *
5638  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5639  * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5640  * can be called from any context.
5641  */
5642 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5643 				     u16 tid);
5644 
5645 /**
5646  * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5647  *
5648  * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5649  * @addr: station's address
5650  *
5651  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5652  *
5653  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5654  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5655  */
5656 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5657 					 const u8 *addr);
5658 
5659 /**
5660  * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5661  *
5662  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5663  * @addr: remote station's address
5664  * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5665  *
5666  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5667  *
5668  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5669  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5670  *
5671  * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5672  *      the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5673  *      We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5674  *      logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5675  *      BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5676  *      In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5677  *      is not reliable.
5678  *
5679  * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5680  */
5681 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5682 					       const u8 *addr,
5683 					       const u8 *localaddr);
5684 
5685 /**
5686  * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5687  * @hw: the hardware
5688  * @pubsta: the station
5689  * @block: whether to block or unblock
5690  *
5691  * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5692  * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5693  * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5694  * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5695  * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5696  *
5697  * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5698  * manner.
5699  *
5700  * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5701  * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5702  * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5703  * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5704  * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5705  * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5706  * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5707  * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5708  * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5709  * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5710  * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5711  * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5712  * woke up while blocked or not.
5713  */
5714 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5715 			       struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5716 
5717 /**
5718  * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5719  * @pubsta: the station
5720  *
5721  * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5722  * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5723  * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5724  * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5725  *
5726  * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5727  * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5728  * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5729  * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5730  *
5731  * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5732  *     driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5733  *     you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5734  *     and restore the _irqsafe version!
5735  */
5736 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5737 
5738 /**
5739  * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5740  * @pubsta: the station
5741  * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5742  *
5743  * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5744  * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5745  * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5746  * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5747  * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5748  * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5749  * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5750  * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5751  * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5752  * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5753  * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5754  * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5755  * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5756  * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5757  */
5758 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5759 
5760 /**
5761  * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5762  *
5763  * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call
5764  * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5765  * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5766  * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5767  *
5768  * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5769  * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5770  * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5771  * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5772  * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5773  * attempts.
5774  *
5775  * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5776  * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5777  * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5778  * them to 0.
5779  *
5780  * @pubsta: the station
5781  * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5782  * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5783  * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5784  */
5785 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5786 				    u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5787 
5788 /**
5789  * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
5790  *
5791  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5792  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5793  *
5794  * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
5795  * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
5796  */
5797 bool
5798 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
5799 
5800 /**
5801  * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5802  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5803  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5804  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5805  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5806  *
5807  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5808  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5809  * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5810  * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5811  * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5812  * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5813  *
5814  * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5815  * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5816  * set_key callback.
5817  */
5818 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5819 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5820 			 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5821 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5822 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5823 				      struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5824 				      void *data),
5825 			 void *iter_data);
5826 
5827 /**
5828  * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5829  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5830  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5831  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5832  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5833  *
5834  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5835  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5836  * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5837  * in removal process will be skipped.
5838  *
5839  * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5840  * and thus iter must be atomic.
5841  */
5842 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5843 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5844 			     void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5845 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5846 					  struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5847 					  struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5848 					  void *data),
5849 			     void *iter_data);
5850 
5851 /**
5852  * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5853  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5854  * @iter: iterator function
5855  * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5856  *
5857  * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5858  * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5859  * places while calling into the driver.
5860  *
5861  * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5862  * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5863  * removed.
5864  *
5865  * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5866  * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5867  * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5868  * or not.
5869  */
5870 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5871 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5872 	void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5873 		     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5874 		     void *data),
5875 	void *iter_data);
5876 
5877 /**
5878  * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5879  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5880  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5881  *
5882  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5883  * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5884  * information. This function must only be called from within the
5885  * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5886  * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5887  * %NULL.
5888  *
5889  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5890  */
5891 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5892 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5893 
5894 /**
5895  * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5896  *
5897  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5898  *
5899  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
5900  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
5901  * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5902  */
5903 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5904 
5905 /**
5906  * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5907  *
5908  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5909  *
5910  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
5911  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5912  * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
5913  * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5914  * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
5915  *
5916  * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5917  * without connection recovery attempts.
5918  */
5919 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5920 
5921 /**
5922  * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection
5923  *
5924  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5925  * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired
5926  *
5927  * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a
5928  * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired.
5929  */
5930 void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect);
5931 
5932 /**
5933  * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5934  *
5935  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5936  *
5937  * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5938  * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5939  * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5940  * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5941  * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5942  *
5943  * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5944  * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5945  * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5946  * disconnect normally later.
5947  *
5948  * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5949  * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5950  * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5951  * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5952  */
5953 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5954 
5955 /**
5956  * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5957  *	rssi threshold triggered
5958  *
5959  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5960  * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5961  * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
5962  * @gfp: context flags
5963  *
5964  * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
5965  * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5966  * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5967  */
5968 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5969 			       enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5970 			       s32 rssi_level,
5971 			       gfp_t gfp);
5972 
5973 /**
5974  * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5975  *
5976  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5977  * @gfp: context flags
5978  */
5979 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5980 
5981 /**
5982  * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5983  *
5984  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5985  */
5986 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5987 
5988 /**
5989  * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5990  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5991  * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5992  *
5993  * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5994  * and wake up the suspended queues.
5995  */
5996 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5997 
5998 /**
5999  * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
6000  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6001  * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
6002  *
6003  * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
6004  * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
6005  * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
6006  */
6007 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6008 			    enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
6009 
6010 /**
6011  * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
6012  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6013  */
6014 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6015 
6016 /**
6017  * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
6018  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6019  */
6020 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6021 
6022 /**
6023  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
6024  *
6025  * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
6026  * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
6027  * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
6028  * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
6029  * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
6030  * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
6031  *
6032  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6033  * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
6034  * @addr: & to bssid mac address
6035  */
6036 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
6037 				  const u8 *addr);
6038 
6039 /**
6040  * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
6041  * @pubsta: station struct
6042  * @tid: the session's TID
6043  * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
6044  *	assumed to be out of the window after the call
6045  * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
6046  * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
6047  *
6048  * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
6049  * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
6050  * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
6051  * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
6052  */
6053 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
6054 					  u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
6055 					  u16 received_mpdus);
6056 
6057 /**
6058  * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
6059  *
6060  * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
6061  * buffer.
6062  *
6063  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6064  * @ra: the peer's destination address
6065  * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
6066  * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
6067  */
6068 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
6069 
6070 /**
6071  * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
6072  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6073  * @addr: station mac address
6074  * @tid: the rx tid
6075  */
6076 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
6077 				 unsigned int tid);
6078 
6079 /**
6080  * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
6081  *
6082  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6083  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6084  * reordering.
6085  *
6086  * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6087  * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
6088  *
6089  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6090  * @addr: station mac address
6091  * @tid: the rx tid
6092  */
6093 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6094 						      const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6095 {
6096 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6097 		return;
6098 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
6099 }
6100 
6101 /**
6102  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
6103  *
6104  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6105  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6106  * reordering.
6107  *
6108  * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6109  * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
6110  *
6111  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6112  * @addr: station mac address
6113  * @tid: the rx tid
6114  */
6115 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6116 						     const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6117 {
6118 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6119 		return;
6120 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
6121 }
6122 
6123 /**
6124  * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
6125  *
6126  * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
6127  * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
6128  *
6129  * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
6130  *
6131  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6132  * @addr: station mac address
6133  * @tid: the rx tid
6134  */
6135 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6136 				   const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
6137 
6138 /* Rate control API */
6139 
6140 /**
6141  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
6142  *
6143  * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
6144  * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
6145  * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
6146  * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
6147  *	to be filled in
6148  * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
6149  *	which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
6150  *	used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
6151  * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
6152  *	RTS threshold
6153  * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
6154  *	if the selected rate supports it
6155  * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
6156  * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
6157  * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
6158  */
6159 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
6160 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
6161 	struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
6162 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
6163 	struct sk_buff *skb;
6164 	struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
6165 	bool rts, short_preamble;
6166 	u32 rate_idx_mask;
6167 	u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
6168 	bool bss;
6169 };
6170 
6171 /**
6172  * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
6173  */
6174 enum rate_control_capabilities {
6175 	/**
6176 	 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
6177 	 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
6178 	 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
6179 	 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
6180 	 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
6181 	 */
6182 	RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
6183 };
6184 
6185 struct rate_control_ops {
6186 	unsigned long capa;
6187 	const char *name;
6188 	void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6189 	void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
6190 			    struct dentry *debugfsdir);
6191 	void (*free)(void *priv);
6192 
6193 	void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
6194 	void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6195 			  struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6196 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
6197 	void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6198 			    struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6199 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6200 			    u32 changed);
6201 	void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6202 			 void *priv_sta);
6203 
6204 	void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
6205 			      struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6206 			      void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
6207 	void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6208 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6209 			  struct sk_buff *skb);
6210 	void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6211 			 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6212 
6213 	void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
6214 				struct dentry *dir);
6215 
6216 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6217 };
6218 
6219 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6220 				 enum nl80211_band band,
6221 				 int index)
6222 {
6223 	return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6224 }
6225 
6226 static inline s8
6227 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6228 		  struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6229 {
6230 	int i;
6231 
6232 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6233 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6234 			return i;
6235 
6236 	/* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6237 	WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6238 
6239 	/* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6240 	return 0;
6241 }
6242 
6243 static inline
6244 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6245 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6246 {
6247 	unsigned int i;
6248 
6249 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6250 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6251 			return true;
6252 	return false;
6253 }
6254 
6255 /**
6256  * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6257  *
6258  * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6259  * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6260  * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6261  * the most recent rate control module decision.
6262  *
6263  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6264  * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6265  * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6266  */
6267 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6268 			   struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6269 			   struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6270 
6271 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6272 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6273 
6274 static inline bool
6275 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6276 {
6277 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6278 }
6279 
6280 static inline bool
6281 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6282 {
6283 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6284 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6285 }
6286 
6287 static inline bool
6288 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6289 {
6290 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6291 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6292 }
6293 
6294 static inline bool
6295 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6296 {
6297 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6298 }
6299 
6300 static inline bool
6301 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6302 {
6303 	return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6304 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6305 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6306 }
6307 
6308 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6309 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6310 {
6311 	if (p2p) {
6312 		switch (type) {
6313 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6314 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6315 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6316 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6317 		default:
6318 			break;
6319 		}
6320 	}
6321 	return type;
6322 }
6323 
6324 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6325 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6326 {
6327 	return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6328 }
6329 
6330 /**
6331  * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6332  *
6333  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6334  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6335  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6336  *
6337  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6338  * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6339  * matching GroupId management frame.
6340  * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6341  */
6342 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6343 				const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6344 
6345 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6346 				   int rssi_min_thold,
6347 				   int rssi_max_thold);
6348 
6349 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6350 
6351 /**
6352  * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6353  *
6354  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6355  *
6356  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6357  *
6358  * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6359  * applicable.
6360  */
6361 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6362 
6363 /**
6364  * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6365  * @vif: virtual interface
6366  * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6367  * @gfp: allocation flags
6368  *
6369  * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6370  */
6371 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6372 				    struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6373 				    gfp_t gfp);
6374 
6375 /**
6376  * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6377  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6378  * @vif: virtual interface
6379  * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6380  * @band: the band to transmit on
6381  * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6382  *
6383  * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6384  */
6385 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6386 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6387 			      int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6388 
6389 /**
6390  * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header
6391  *				 of injected frames
6392  * @skb: packet injected by userspace
6393  * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
6394  */
6395 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb,
6396 				 struct net_device *dev);
6397 
6398 /**
6399  * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6400  *
6401  * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6402  * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6403  *
6404  * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6405  *
6406  * private:
6407  *
6408  * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6409  * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6410  */
6411 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6412 	u32 next_tsf;
6413 	bool has_next_tsf;
6414 
6415 	u8 absent;
6416 
6417 	u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6418 	struct {
6419 		u32 start;
6420 		u32 duration;
6421 		u32 interval;
6422 	} desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6423 };
6424 
6425 /**
6426  * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6427  *
6428  * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6429  * @data: NoA tracking data
6430  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6431  *
6432  * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6433  */
6434 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6435 			    struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6436 
6437 /**
6438  * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6439  *
6440  * @data: NoA tracking data
6441  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6442  */
6443 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6444 
6445 /**
6446  * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6447  * @vif: virtual interface
6448  * @peer: the peer's destination address
6449  * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6450  * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6451  * @gfp: allocation flags
6452  *
6453  * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6454  */
6455 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6456 				 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6457 				 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6458 
6459 /**
6460  * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6461  *
6462  * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6463  * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6464  * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6465  * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6466  * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6467  * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6468  *
6469  * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6470  * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6471  * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6472  *
6473  * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6474  * @tid: the TID to reserve
6475  *
6476  * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6477  */
6478 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6479 
6480 /**
6481  * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6482  *
6483  * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6484  * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6485  * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6486  *
6487  * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6488  * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6489  * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6490  *
6491  * @sta: the station
6492  * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6493  */
6494 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6495 
6496 /**
6497  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6498  *
6499  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6500  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6501  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6502  *
6503  * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6504  *
6505  * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6506  * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6507  * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the
6508  * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6509  * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6510  * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6511  * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6512  *
6513  * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6514  * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6515  */
6516 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6517 				     struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6518 
6519 /**
6520  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6521  * (in process context)
6522  *
6523  * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6524  * (internally disables bottom halves).
6525  *
6526  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6527  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6528  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6529  */
6530 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6531 						      struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6532 {
6533 	struct sk_buff *skb;
6534 
6535 	local_bh_disable();
6536 	skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6537 	local_bh_enable();
6538 
6539 	return skb;
6540 }
6541 
6542 /**
6543  * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6544  *
6545  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6546  * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6547  *
6548  * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6549  * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6550  * driver has finished scheduling it.
6551  */
6552 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6553 
6554 /**
6555  * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6556  *
6557  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6558  * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6559  *
6560  * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6561  * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6562  */
6563 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6564 
6565 /* (deprecated) */
6566 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6567 {
6568 }
6569 
6570 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6571 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
6572 
6573 /**
6574  * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6575  *
6576  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6577  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6578  *
6579  * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6580  * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6581  *
6582  * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6583  * this TXQ internally.
6584  */
6585 static inline void
6586 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6587 {
6588 	__ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
6589 }
6590 
6591 /**
6592  * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6593  *
6594  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6595  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6596  * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
6597  *
6598  * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
6599  * internally.
6600  */
6601 static inline void
6602 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6603 		     bool force)
6604 {
6605 	__ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
6606 }
6607 
6608 /**
6609  * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6610  *
6611  * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6612  * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6613  * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6614  * next_txq().
6615  *
6616  * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6617  * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6618  * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6619  * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6620  * again.
6621  *
6622  * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6623  * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6624  * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6625  * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6626  * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6627  * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6628  *
6629  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6630  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6631  */
6632 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6633 				struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6634 
6635 /**
6636  * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6637  *
6638  * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6639  * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6640  * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6641  *
6642  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6643  * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6644  * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6645  */
6646 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6647 			     unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6648 			     unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6649 
6650 /**
6651  * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6652  *
6653  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6654  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6655  *
6656  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6657  * @inst_id: the local instance id
6658  * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6659  * @gfp: allocation flags
6660  */
6661 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6662 				   u8 inst_id,
6663 				   enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6664 				   gfp_t gfp);
6665 
6666 /**
6667  * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6668  *
6669  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6670  * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6671  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6672  *
6673  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6674  * @match: match event information
6675  * @gfp: allocation flags
6676  */
6677 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6678 			      struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6679 			      gfp_t gfp);
6680 
6681 /**
6682  * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
6683  *
6684  * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6685  * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
6686  *
6687  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6688  * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
6689  *          information.
6690  * @len: frame length in bytes
6691  */
6692 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6693 			      struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
6694 			      int len);
6695 
6696 /**
6697  * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
6698  *
6699  * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6700  * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
6701  *
6702  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6703  * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
6704  * @len: frame length in bytes
6705  */
6706 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6707 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
6708 			      int len);
6709 /**
6710  * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading.
6711  *
6712  * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3
6713  * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the
6714  * hardware or firmware.
6715  *
6716  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6717  * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off
6718  */
6719 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable);
6720 
6721 /**
6722  * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template.
6723  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6724  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6725  *
6726  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
6727  *
6728  * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error.
6729  */
6730 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6731 						  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6732 
6733 /**
6734  * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast
6735  *	probe response template.
6736  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6737  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6738  *
6739  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
6740  *
6741  * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error.
6742  */
6743 struct sk_buff *
6744 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6745 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6746 #endif /* MAC80211_H */
6747